Home

iPervoice Installation Manual V3.20

1. Figure 39 Startup Wizard Procedure splash screen Once launched the StartUp Wizard will present its main page where the installer is reminded that the guided procedure will create the system basic structure only for the system IP devices As shown in Figure 39 the user interface displays the list of steps on the left side following a specific order the current step is highlighted in the centre the detailed information concerning the step in progress is displayed By pressing the button Start Wizard the procedure starts W Warning If there are VoIP telephones 4501 5 in the system they need some preliminary settings in order to be detected by the Pervoice server and be available in the list of the new devices to be configured These operations are described in the chapter VoIP Telephone Configuration Preliminary Operations for VolP 4501 5 telephone registration on page 114 94 Per VOICE Although the StartUp Wizard is a guided procedure the user can move inside it with a certain flexibility At the bottom of each page there are three buttons that allow you to return to the previous step Previous Page stop the wizard and return to the main page Back to main page and finally go to the next step Next page Figure 40 Previous page Backtomainpage Next page Figure 40 Startup Wizard Command buttons CONFIGURATION CONSTRAINTS As described later the Startup Wizard defines a fix
2. 6 Rotate the adjustment trimmer Video Adj as shown in the following figure until the bicolour led becomes green in this way the output video signal amplified by the power supply will be correctly adjusted 19 i er VOICE Green OK Trimmer 7 Once the adjustment procedure is completed release the bistable button on the power supply to switch the led off 8 Repeat steps 3 4 5 for each riser power supply 9 Once the adjustment procedure is completed press the switch placed on the IP gateway to exit from Video adjustment mode W Warning ifthe system is not in Video adjustment mode after releasing the button on power supply units the test led will always turn on red even if the video signal has been correctly adjusted For this reason during the normal operation keep the button on the power supply units pressed in order to disable the led 7 6 APARTMENT STATIONS CONFIGURATION As described in the next chapters IPervoice system configuration is almost totally performed with a laptop and a PDA Phone or a Netbook except for apartment stations that are provided with micro switches dip switches on the video door phone bracket that must be locally programmed on the device Apartment stations are also provided with buttons that can be associated to specific functions in some models additional button modules can also be installed to perform other functions 7 6 1 DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION All doo
3. Confirm Cancel Figure 179 Advanced functions configuration Entering call modules door profile The following table describes the field meaning and limits for data input Code Door profile code value assigned by the system Name Door profile identifier alohanumeric required field Max length 32 characters Type Door opening mode The value can be selected from a pull down menu Available values are e Secret the apartment station door lock release button will only activate the electrical lock if the apartment is in audio conversation or in video connection with the call module or has been called and is waiting to be answered e Free ifthe apartment station door lock release button is pressed the call module electrical lock can be activated if the call module is configured as main or is configured as secondary and the user belongs to the same column as the call module even if there is no call in progress with the door unit This feature is typically used in secondary call modules Default value Secret Door Time Pulse length on the command relay Default values 1 second Each passage is independently treated so different values can be assigned to each of them Min 1 sec max 999 sec Default value 1 sec 220 Door Forced Alarm Max Door opening Time Time Profile i er VOICE If selected this means that the door generates an alarm if it has been forced Default value Not selected W Warning to
4. Main technical characteristics e 1RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to the IP network e 1 CAT5 RJ45 port for connection to the analogue riser e Power supply PoE 48 V nominal e Current consumption in standby 52 mA 70 mA max e Operating temperature range 5 45 C e Dimensions 180 W x 90 H x 80 D mm 10 DIN modules e Installation on DIN rail Main technical characteristics e 4 x10 100 Mbit s PoE Ethernet ports able to provide 15 4 W each port but no more than a total of 32 W e 4 x10 100 Mbit s Ethernet ports e Power supply by a provided power supply unit in in 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz out 48 Vdc 0 8 A e Operating temperature range 0 40 C e Dimensions 235 W x 28 H x 100 D mm e Installation table top or wall mounting IP CATS Gateway 1039 50 The IP CATS gateway performs the interface function between the street side digital section based on Ethernet PoE network and the analogue riser column The gateway implements the analogue digital conversion of audio and video signals between the two communication buses On the device front panel there is a button used to activate a video signal adjusting phase for the analogue column 4 PoE ports 4 Ethernet ports Switch 1039 44 The switch 1039 44 is provided with Power over Ethernet PoE function has 8 ports and can operate both in LOOMbps Fast Ethernet and in 10Mbps Ethernet The ports from 1 to 4 use the PoE standard
5. 0 C Dimensions 172 W x 55 H x 114 D mm Installation wall mounting Web Server for system Video Server 1039 69 The device 1039 69 allows the connection of up to 4 traditional analogue cameras and displays the captured images on the video door phones or on the concierge switchboards The video server acquires the analogue signal of each camera converts it to digital and sends it on the IP network as data stream W Warning the cameras must be locally powered System IP Server 1039 1 The server 1039 1 is the IPervoice system core It is housed in a wall mounting metal box All the services provided by the IPervoice system are managed and controlled by the server The connection to the IP network that is the main facility of IPervoice is made by means of an Ethernet port embedded in the server There are two other USB ports that can be used to update the application software or to add expansions System programming configuration and control operations are fully available through the embedded Web server The server is also involved in configuration and periodic checking of the system devices signalling tampering or malfunctioning All the information needed for the system configuration is stored in the Pervoice server Any system device can be replaced easily and quickly A backup of the configuration data stored in the server can also be performed in order to restore the whole system in case of failure 21
6. Code Name Door time Key Reader door profile a ja Door Forced Alarm Max Door Opening Time E 5 Time profile Confirm J Cancel Figure 180 Advanced functions configuration Entering IP key reader door profile The following table describes the field meaning Code Name Door Time Door Forced Alarm Max Door opening Time Door profile code value assigned by the system Door profile identifier alphanumeric required field Max length 32 characters Pulse length on the command relay Default values 1 second Each passage is independently treated so different values can be assigned to each of them Min 1 sec max 999 sec Default value 1 sec If selected this means that the door generates an alarm if it has been forced Default value Not selected W Warning to use this function connect an open door sensor to the IP key reader It defines the max time of door opening after which a door open signal is generated Min 1 sec max 999 sec Default value Not selected W Warning to use this function connect an open door sensor to the IP key reader 222 Time Profile W Multi Site Per VOICE Selection of Time Profile assigned to the passage if available See chapter Time Bands on page 62 The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains other profiles previously programmed For information about time profiles definition refer to chapt
7. Figure 185 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Enter an external person group As described above to create or change a group in Multi Site mode select the site server where to start data entering The page shown by the FrontEnd to the user Figure 185 contains in the upper side the name of the current site and allows to add a user by pressing the button Add an external person in the same page W Note lf the user number in the same group is higher than 10 the FrontEnd will automatically group them in sub groups identified by the first letter of the last name This identification will be used also in the devices tree 227 ADDING NAMES Per VOICE Resident LastName Brown Resident First Name Phillip Phone number Accessiblity level Access profile Custom Access r V Used door code Door Code Time profile Start validity End validity Suspended V Used key code Key code x Time profile x Color None 7 None 2012 01 02 21 18 Start validity 20 12 01 02 2 2 18 se 2013 01 02 21 18 End validity 2013 01 02 21 18 E Suspended Figure 186 Advanced functions configuration Adding an external person To enter identification data for externals follow the procedure already described for residents see paragraph Resident Management on page 191 The following table describes fields and references for further details Las
8. H 264 Originally developed by Apple Computers it is a very efficient codec used in last generation cellular phones 3G and also for transmitting high definition HD films on the Internet In fact this codec is able to ensure the same quality as the MPEG 2 standard used in DVD supports reducing from a third to a half the requested speed data rate for sending information Using the H 264 codec Pervoice can manage a high number of simultaneous conversations maintaining the high quality and fluidity of the images 640 x 480 pixels with 30 frame sec G 711 It was developed for use in VoIP technology in fact it is one of the main codecs used in this field G 711 allows an excellent audio quality with a rather low data rate 64 Kbit sec and a minimum processing time is required for the compression decompression algorithm 10 Per VOICE 3 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS IPervoice can provide many features that make it possible to create solutions for residential building complexes of considerable size The potential and the strong points of IPervoice are illustrated in the following list which includes the main characteristics of Pervoice in different areas of competence WIRING AND INSTALLATION e Pervoice uses an UTP CATS cable for both the IP network and the building risers making the wiring and the installation of the system easier e The highly flexible architecture of IPervoice allows to create a fully IP networked system for
9. Accessibility Level Access profile Name required field Maximum length 32 characters First name required field Maximum length 32 characters Visible resident if set to Yes it allows the name surname and first name to be displayed on the call modules Available values Yes No Default value No Telephone number associated to the resident This field is optional Maximum length 16 numeric characters Not used For future purposes When selected it allows from the pull down menu to multiply by the indicated factor the door opening time programmed on the device Allowed values min 1 max 10 Default value Not selected Selection of user access profile if available The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains the previously programmed profiles if present For information about access profile definition refer to chapter Advanced functions configuration Access Profile on page 216 192 Per VOICE Used door code If selected it means that a door lock release code is associated to the resident For programming procedure see the paragraph Door Code Configuration on page 193 Default value Not selected Used key code If selected it means that a proximity key is associated to the resident For programming procedure see the paragraph Key Code Configuration on page 196 Default value Not selected Table 47 Residents management Basic data programming 11 4 1 RESIDENTS AD
10. Call module name Under the call module item in the example of Figure 103 Main Entrance Call Module or West Entrance Call Module there is a selection box if selected this enables the display of the map the system doesn t allow to save if the file is not present and the box is selected Import an image Field used to load the image in png jpeg or gif format shown by the call module after the entrance door has been opened As in other similar cases press the button Browse to select the desired image file Press the button Clear to delete the selected image Image max size 240 x 250 pixel Table 36 Stair advanced configuration Access path graphic maps Meaning of configuration parameters 9 9 2 CALL BUTTONS On apartment stations there are some configurable buttons which can send commands also outside the apartment They are usually used when the handset of the apartment station has been picked up or the conversation button has been pressed on hands free models to call a switchboard another apartment of the same riser column connected to the same IP gateway or a VoIP telephone Figure 104 tin order to convert from other graphic formats use the application Paint provided with Windows operating systems or other similar utilities The number of available buttons can change according to apartment station model used in apartments in this case the system uses the max numb
11. Confirm Cancel Figure 223 System maintenance Adding new devices by MAC address Figure 223 displays the Popup window used to enter data the following table shows the fields and their meaning Device Type Device type value can be selected from a pull down menu that contains the list of IP devices available in IPervoice system Mac Address Device MAC address required field W Warning address hexadecimal digits pairs must be separated a by the character 262 Per VOICE 13 6 3 ADDING NEW COLUMN OR APARTMENT DEVICES To add a new column device in the following example a 4 user decoder 1039 34 first of all identify the IP Gateway to which the decoder must be associated to do this search in the devices tree the block and the stair where the gateway has been installed select it and expand the item Decoders the FrontEnd displays a page as shown in Figure 225 Press the button Add a decoder to enter data T Technical Guide System al z Time Profiles ot Ss Primary call module primary entry panel E n Blocks Name Number E SAM East Brock Decodert 1 Delete Feima Block Decoder2 2 Delete E nl west Block mi l El west Stair E Secondary Call module HE Secondary eniry panel z Gateway West Tower ey Decoders Py decodert E Sy Decoder2 8 J Decoder zj ey Decoders E Elun interface Figure 224 System maintenance Adding a new Decoder Also in this case the d
12. Date Time 2042 01 02 24 51 36 2012 01 02 21 42 00 2012 01 02 17 01 43 2012 01 02 16 59 42 2012 01 02 16 55 11 2012 01 02 16 53 30 2012 01 02 16 40 15 2011 41 14 08 52 42 2011 11 14 08 46 31 2014 11 13 23 01 15 2011 11 13 19 48 30 2011 10 26 14 17 36 2011 10 26 14 45 22 2011 10 26 14 11 00 2011 10 21 11 45 16 2010 12 07 17 17 32 2010 12 07 17 15 15 Event Type FE login FW UPGR COMPLETED FW UPGR COMPLETED FW UPGR COMPLETED WITH REBOOT FW UPGR REQUESTED FW UPGR REQUESTED FE login FE login FE login FE login FW UPGR COMPLETED FW UPGR COMPLETED FW UPGR COMPLETED WITH REBOOT FW UPGR REQUESTED FW UPGR COMPLETED FW UPGR COMPLETED WITH REBOOT FW UPGR REQUESTED Source Soft user Soft user Soft user Soft user Soft user sysadmin sysadmin sysadmin installer sysadmin Exportiog Destination Figure 234 Utility functions System Log management Quit log Data Type Data Reason The list shows some events stored by the system for each one there are all specific data useful to identify it Some data are always present as Date and Time or event type while others are saved coherently with the information type Click on the top of the column to change the order Default sort key is date and time of the event 269 Per VOICE In the menu bar there are some buttons used for the following functions gt Log Search It shows search fields used to filter the e
13. Figure 107 A page is displayed where besides the button used to download the config dat file described later in this document there are two other buttons the first one is used to download the version for Symbian PDA the second one to obtain the software dedicated to Windows Mobile devices Figure 108 MAINTENANCE REFRESH STARTUP WIZARD DIAGNOSTIC Device change Backup and restore MYCALE Figure 107 SoftMobile Software installation Procedure start up Warning Current version of SoftWobile application support only UIQ 3 and S60 3rd Edition Feature Pack 1 and S60 5th edition AKA Symbian 1 of Symbian operating system For this last one on touch screen devices the SoftMobile application only operates in keyboard emulation mode a Warning Dev ices using WIDCOMM implementation for Bluetooth interface as iPAQ Hewlett Packard HP devices or PDA HTC Touch2 are not compatible with the current SoftMobile application 158 i Per VOICE Write to Mobile It provides to the installer the ability to download all the programmable configurations of the system into a mobile device Download Dat file of Mobile configurator for Java enabled device R Kbie Mobile configurator for Windows device Figure 108 Column devices programming procedure SoftMobile Software Installation The installation procedure can be different a
14. IP System Server i i 1039 1 i i i i i i i i i i I i i i i i i I i i il l Gateway IP CATS Intercom Interface IP Call Module palin idh oes coe i z 1039 14 N ee Lift Interface i l 2039 34 Ba 1039 37 md i E s i N i I i i i i i 1 l i I i i i 3 Installer Configuration i Notebook data SSS i Smart Phone i i i lesser l l eee ee ee ee ll SSS a First config Step gt Second config Step Figure 33 Pervoice configuration steps 84 8 2 THE FRONTEND The fundamental tool used to configure the IPervoice system is a Web based application resident on the server 1039 1 called FrontEnd To use this application connect a laptop Notebook or Netbook to the IPervoice IP network and access to the FrontEnd with a browser commonly used for Internet The installation is easy no additional specific programs are needed on the installer s computer and in case of server software update the last system version is always available If the system includes at least one concierge switchboard 1039 41 it can also be used for configuring operations To access to the Pervoice FrontEnd enter in the browser address bar the following address http 192 168 1 1 as shown in Figure 34 the login page of the configuration software will be displayed by entering username and password gt
15. J Backup all data diagnostic logs it provides to the installer the ability to extract all the system configuration information with diagostic logs and to download them as a single file Restore all data from a previous backup It provides the ability to restore a saved configuration information on the system Next Figure 200 System maintenance System configuration backup procedure start 100 Configuration data are stored in a compressed file that the installer must save in a PC folder as 101 shown in Figure 201 Once the operation is complete the display shows the following screen Figure 202 File Download Do you want to open or save this file i Name Backup tar lt i Type tar Archive 37 1 MB From http 192 168 1 1 V Aways ask before opening this type of file harm your computer F you do not trust the source do not open or i 2 While files from the Intemet can be useful some files can potentially save this file What s the isk Figure 201 System maintenance System configuration backup compressed archive save Backup all data Backup has succeeded Database was saved in a TAR file Figure 202 System maintenance System configuration backup procedure completed 100 The name of the backup file is as follows Backup_yyyyMMddhhmm tar gz where characters yyyyMMddhhmm indicate year month day hour and minute in which the backup was created The figure refers t
16. Search _ Athletes Village NO3 FW3 0 no result Athletes Village NO7 FW3 0 no result _ gt Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 _ Athletes Village N15 FW 3 0 no result Plot N01 4 Last name First name Security Key20 P Plot NO2 Plot NO3 Available sites FIAN W Athletes Village NO3 FW3 0 W Athletes Village NO7 FW3 0 V Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 W Athletes Village N15 FW 3 0 F Plot N01 W Plot NO2 iM Plot NO3 W Plot NO4 WF Plot NOS v Plot N10 VI Plot N13 W Plot N14 iM Plot N15 W Plot N26N W Plot N26S Figure 244 Multi Site mode Utility functions Search by last name For sites without results the text no result appears on the right of the site name see Figure 245 Athletes Village N03 FW3 0 no result Figure 245 Multi Site mode Utility functions No result found 277 Per VOICE 14 STAND ALONE FRONTEND USAGE IPERVOICE SA FE IPervoice allows to configure the system and its devices using the FrontEnd This can be used in two different modes the first one called Server mode is described in the previous chapters the second one called Mobile mode will be treated in this chapter For Mobile mode it is necessary to use Stand Alone FrontEnd or Pervoice sa fe a dedicated software application provided with the system Its main characteristics are the following gt All operations concerning system configuration can
17. Topological search returns also the objects that are hierarchically over the found ones The example shows that besides the apartments also belonging floor stair and block are returned 13 11 3 SEARCH BY NUMERIC CODE This search is used instead of topological code mode when the system is configured to operate in this adressing mode In the text box enter the code to be searched or part of it Search by Numeric code E Search if Object type Name Logic code Switchboard Concierge Figure 240 Utility functions Search by numeric code 274 Per VOICE 13 11 4 SEARCH BY TYPE AND DEVICE NAME This search is useful to find one or more devices of a specific type for ex call modules video server lift interfaces decoder and so on A specific mask used to enter data guides the user to enter the device type with a pull down menu and enter the name in the text box Figure 241 shows an example Search by Search Device type and device name Device type Name Decoder ki f Device type Name Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder Decodert Decoder Deecder3 Decoder4 Figure 241 Utility functions Search by type and device name 13 11 5 SEARCH BY KEY CODE BADGE CODE This search mode allows to find one or more users by the proximity key code In order to perform this search enter the hexadecimal key code in the field Search Searchby Badge code 7 Search Search i Last Name First name Brown Rotten S
18. 4dB 5dB Speakers Loudspeaker audio level it cannot be changed Available values 5dB 3dB OdB 3dB 4dB 5dB Tones Key click volume Allowed values OFF 5dB 3dB OdB 4dB 3dB 5dB Audio Messages Audio messages volume Allowed a OFF ee Soe OdB 4dB 3dB 5dB ae Allowed values OFF 1 2 3 4 5 Infra red active User presence detection with embedded infra red sensor enabling Allowed values Yes No Camera Leds active Camera led illuminator enabling Yes Allowed values Yes No Table 30 Advanced Configuration Meaning of interface options parameters 9 2 4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Almost all the devices that generate an event after a status change an alarm or an action can activate a command for one or more system outputs These outputs are usually on the IP special decoders 1039 80 P Special functions Drive output on Call Not assigned Outputs Y Output List Main Light ON OFF TOGGLE Side Light ON OFF TOGGLE Drive output on Hold up Alarm Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Drive output on Tamper Alarm Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Drive output on Special Code Not assigned Outputs D Output List Figure 77 Advanced configuration Special Decoder Functions that can be associated to the IP call module 128 i er VOICE Each command function can have two operating states Not assigned Outputs Default condition the function has no effect
19. Type Stand alone Last Name Fool First name Swimming IP address 0 0 0 0 MAC address 00 TEE Os00 08 7F Ful version Device status UNKNOWN Yoip Phone code Block code BO Add a block Star code 2 Add astaw Stair will De added on current bock Floor code Fi Add afioor Floor will be added on current stair Voip Phone code Vi Confirm Back to New device Figure 261 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Configuration of a new IP device 14 9 COLUMN DEVICES CONFIGURATION USING IPERVOICE SA FE One of the most useful functions of lperVoice sa fe is the capability to configure column devices without using an external PDA device See chapter Column Devices Configuration System Data Download to PDA and Smartphone device on page 160 and following In order to use this feature the PC where the Stand Alone FrontEnd is installed must be equipped with a Bluetooth interface used to communicate with the dongle 1039 56 connected to the column devices to be programmed In order that the application can use the 1039 56 when it is used for the first time perform the pairing procedure as described in chapter 14 9 2 14 9 1 SELECTING THE DEVICE TO BE CONFIGURED AND TRANSFERRING SYSTEM DATA To configure a column device this must be selected as usually from the devices tree The example shows the configuration of a 4 user decoder 1039 34 The display will show a page as the one in Figure 262 where there are two additional buttons
20. as for the other devices This address is displayed in the Switchboard application main page in the area dedicated to calls as shown in Figure 54 If the switchboard has already been configured that field will contain the Identification code Topological code or Logic code chbc view Tooke settings Hep 2 AN Jo K 00_21_6B_4F_DA_E0 Figure 54 Startup Wizard Switchboard MAC address highlighting To configure the concierge switchboards the StartUp Wizard requires the associated name and the identifier used in the topological code to be entered The data entry form also displays some information shown for the other IPervoice devices described above S After configuration it is always possible to know the switchboard MAC Address by selecting from the menu the item Help and then About 109 i shy aii Name Firstname IP address MAC address FW version Device status Switchboard code Per VOICE Startup Wizard Configure a Switchboard Previous page Name Concierge Firstname IP address 192 168 1 132 MAC address 00 2 1 66 4F DA E0 FW version 1 0 9 5 Device status UNKNOVN Switchboard code Block code BOl Addablock Stair code Sii r Adda stair Stair will be added on current block Floor code FO Add afloor Floor will be added on current block Switchboard code Cl Back to main page Next page Figure 55 Wizard Configuration of a new switchboard Name assigne
21. e Free the server assigns IP addresses to any network device that performs a request the server assigns IP addresses only to those devices with MAC addresses previously registered into DHCP server Mostly used in Multi Site mode Default value Free e Blocked The two text boxes allow to set start IP address and end IP address assigned to devices by DHCP To make changes effective reboot the Pervoice server Perform this operation Only a user with System Administrator rights can change features indicated in boxes For further details see paragraph Software Users Configuration on page 242 23 7 Per VOICE 12 7 1 SERVER CONFIGURATION IN MULTI SITE MODE If Multi Site mode is active in the server configuration page there is the button Goto multi site n95 configuration as shown in Figure 193 W Warning To configure a system in Multi Site mode some specific operations must be performed only by qualified technical personnel It is suggested not to perform arbitrary operations which could cause malfunction in the system Command Command Execute IperView Actived Deactivate IperView 4 All updates need reboot server Date amp time Timing zone Europe Rome UTC 01 00 Automatic Daylight saving time Daylight Saving Time status inactive MMIDDIYYYY Server date amp time 12 28 2011 09 29 12 amp All updates need reboot server Set Cancel I
22. these must also be configured to complete the apartment programming procedure Otherwise the configuration can be considered complete and the next decoder can be programmed 168 Per VOICE PAIRING WITH BLUETOOTH PROGRAMMING INTERFACE WINDOWS MOBILE If the Bluetooth device 1039 56 is used for the first time the identification procedure is automatically activated Figure 120 shows the procedure to be used in this case first of all the user is informed that a new Bluetooth device has been detected and is asked to confirm if it must be added to the list of devices known by the PDA If accepted it is possible to go on with the procedure and the passkey 0000 must be entered After this click the button Next to complete the identification procedure from this moment the interface 1039 56 is known by the PDA and the identification procedure is not needed any more y Connect E t 460 13 Dk Immettere la passkey Immettere una passkey per stabilire una connessione protetta con 1039 56 Programming Device 1039 56 Programming Device Bluetooth 1035 56 Programming Device desidera connettersi al dispositivo in uso mediante Bluetooth Aggiungere 1039 56 Programming Device all elenco di dispositivi Nascondi ES Figure 120 SoftMobile Windows Mobile version Bluetooth programming interface identification and pairing PAIRING WITH BLUETOOTH PROGRAMMING INTERFACE SYMBIAN The automatic identific
23. 16 Main technical characteristics CCD colour camera with wide angle lens 108 H x 87 V Embedded proximity key reader compatible with keys 1125 50 Infrared proximity detector detection Management of audio repeater device for the hard of hearing 3 5 colour graphic display with advanced Graphical User Interface GUI Simultaneous management of electrical lock with pulse capacitive discharge SE SE and a relay contact C NC NO 30V 3 5 A max Second relay for operating an automatic gate C NO 30V 200 mA max Input for entrance hall button exit switch Input for open door contact Alphanumeric keypad with 18 buttons 3 of them are multifunction 1 RJ45 Ethernet port for the connection to the IP network Power supply PoE 48V nominal Current consumption 80 mA min 120 mA max Connection for local power supply if needed Operating temperature range 10 to 50 C Dimensions 130 W x 310 H x 15 D mm wall protrusion Installation in metal flush mounting box 1158 43 Protection degree and impact resistance IP45 IKO9 for user ELEKTA STEEL IP Call Module 1039 14 Provided with a front panel made of vandal proof stainless steel the call module 1039 14 is specifically designed for IPervoice It can independently manage two different outputs the first one used to open a pedestrian door both with capacitive discharge and with relay contacts the second to control for example an a
24. ALIVE DEAD CREATING THE ACCESS PATH The lift interface is provided with 24 relays which can be configured with the FrontEnd in order they close after an event is occurred in the system A typical case is enabling the visitor that enters the residential building to use a lift only to go up to the floor where the resident with the selected name lives To do this it is necessary to create a path that is an association between the device used to enter the building for example a main or secondary call station or an IP key reader placed near a driveway gate and the destination of the visitor that is the floor In the example only the Floor is mentioned because Block and Stair depend on the gateway to which this lift interface is connected 177 To access the path configuration click on Path item under the device name as shown in Figure 131 the display will show the page with the list of the paths already configured To change an existing path click on the linked device type or name to add a path click Add a path in the upper side of the page ate Technical Guide System Ee Path lift list aM Time Profiles n Add a path Primary call module H Primary entry panel n Blocks Type of linked devices Hame of linked devices B n I East Block Primary Call module Main Entrance Cad Module Delete z nA Main Block Key reader Garage Access Reader Delete E n Peli Bick z g 3 Vest Siar H o Se Secondary c
25. Home network iModo becomes a VoIP telephone and also allows to navigate the web thanks to its embedded browser To expansion PoE switch Ses tee Hee He ee eS EE eS a EE E a E E s amp b l eee ee es es M IMODO touch screen monitor 1717 2 Switch 2 4 PoE Ports oe SSS SLs Ssuereseore 1039 45 l 15 To others IP apartments ji nd tb san Scena ohne From IP riser I reactuineirk Fourth apartment I asa na f S lt SS Se Se Se Se Se Se Se Se Se eS Se eS Addition WiFi or LAN connection Internet VoIP Web Surfing Figure 8 The internal level IP apartments 30 Figure 9 shows some typical features of iModo terminal D 15 38 REC L Seat 19 01 2010 i onmi 15 34 Enter Address YR 170 10 he mn Call Switchboard Presmnca TED je o Wideo Door Phone b if2iol4fisisi7islolol p advked Ati dudiklolo Lil akskolilolhij i gapnpnponmnmi adod ac d l IRI Calling Brown Family SS Select name 2 a B nu 1901 20 10 NAME APARTMENT NUMBER al ie 7 Adalbert Waffling Apt02 BISIFAI NAME NUMBER Ci Alastor Moody Aptoa BISIFIA2 a a Alberie Grunion Apt 10 B152F14A9 Adalbert Waffling 39 011 242093 Albus Dumbledore Apt 11 BISIFBA1 Alastor Moody 39 2303102 gt Alphard Black Apt 04 B152F14A2 Alberic Grunion 39 01299992 t Kitchen Albus Dumbledore 86 12121000 X Alphard Black 832 2313231 Er GP Gr Figure 9 iModo Terminal
26. INTERRUPTIBLE i e it can be interrupted by a communication with the same or lower priority Maximum When the user answers a timeout timer starts after which the communication length communication is always closed by the system This time is fixed and is Time T3 equal to 10 minutes Guaranteed conversation time T2 default 30 sec pickup time T1 default 60 sec N User Answer Busy Time W Note the sum of time T1 call pickup time and time T2 Guaranteed conversation time is the Busy time 46 The Table 4 shows the call management according to priority call state and related timeout apartment station T1 conversation time T2 length T3 monitor IP call module or IP video door Max programmed T1 Max programmed T2 10 min unit 5 Switchboard during standard Max programmed T1 Max programmed T2 10 min communication VoIP telephone Apartment station outside the Max programmed T1 Max programmed T2 2 10 min apartment 3 Apartment station inside the Max programmed T1 10 min apartment Auto on CCTV cyclic Not available Max programmed T1 1 Video door phone answering 10 min machine Table 4 Priority and call state diagram During Call pickup time T1 and Guaranteed conversation time T2 e A priority 7 communication cannot be interrupted e A priority 5 or 6 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 7 communication e A priority 1 2
27. SOMWare USER EN Snesere a eneaeeeiakce 242 1AB SSOMW Ave USEN onnar E a a eben nate a a etek 243 1284A Changing the PassWord ciest a copia tiated adnan evies nae ce ines 244 System Maintenance and Utility Functions ccccccccceccsccscescccccccccccccscescescecceccscssccecces 245 Backup of system configuration data aiieisssiasecivrcterdessdssudsseosinn tenn eaalaedrasbeebtaiedaadiesuesen tees 245 13 1 1 Backup of system configuration data in Multi Site mode ou ccc ccc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeeess 247 Restore of system configuration datass einn a A a a N 248 13 2 1 Restore of system configuration data in Multi Site mode 20 20 ccc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeecceeesesseeseeeeeeess 248 Checking server and IP devices firmware version ccccssccescescesccnsceuceeuseueeeuceeuseuseeueeeuceeuseueeeueeeesaness 249 iPervoice Server Uprade sensone nea a a A a 251 134 L IPdevicesautomatic Upgrade sansene a a a a aa aA etna Raa a 254 13 4 2 IPervoice servers upgrade in Multi Site mode nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn1111111nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrnnnrrrnrrrnnnnn 255 IPervoice devices replacement sssssssssssssrsrrssnsenstnsesersttststtsttsttttsttst tt tts ttt tnter t tt tt stttttteneestenenerseenee 256 13a IPdevicesteplacemeiiegsronnen nn e e eiS 256 13 52 Column devices r eplacemeN eses Eee AREE AAE RE EEES 259 Adde neW devices anoni a 259 Bor Addie New IP Ce WICC Sersant orena esse tins lS pene a E 26
28. information e ALIVE The device has been configured and operates correctly e DEAD The device has been configured but it does not communicate with the server Entry panel type Kind of call module use it can be selected from a pull down menu available values are Primary Secondary W Warning if the option Secondary is selected enter the belonging block and the stair as shown in the figure below Entry panel type Secondary Entry panel Code Block code B2 v Adda block Staircode S1 Addastair Table 23 IP Video door unit Identification data W Warning in order to activate the electric lock of doors or gates to be controlled it is necessary to add the Door to the IP Video door unit This operation must be performed as described in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration IP Video Door Unit Entry Panel Doors on page 137 108 i er VOICE 8 3 6 CONCIERGE SWITCHBOARD CONFIGURATION ol Pee a Aa es 1 0 9 5 DEAD ae ET EEN tet a Sees e SS i IS FESS race Se SS a TSA 192 168 1 132 1 0 9 5 IKN i EE E j m a a Te ye ee T wr poe a ahaa Zoi 3 A Figure 53 Startup Wizard List of new Concierge Switchboards The Wizard next step is the concierge switchboards configuration Figure 53 If in the system there is more than one installed switchboard their locations must be identified with the MAC address
29. main features W Note Besides iModo terminal in a short time other IP devices will be available they will complete the line dedicated to IP apartments and allow to extend and integrate IP system features 31 Main technical characteristics 7 colour graphic display with resistive touch screen Resolution 800H x 480V RGB Horizontal viewing angle 50 50 Vertical viewing angle 50 50 1 RJ45 Ethernet port for the connection to Pervoice IP network 1 additional RJ45 Ethernet port for the connection to the apartment LAN network 1 additional WiFi connection for the connection to the apartment LAN network Power supply by PoE 48 V nominal Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 225 L x 134 H x 36 W mm Installation wall mounting with provided bracket IMODO touch screen IP Terminal 1717 2 The apartment terminal 1717 2 is provided with a wide 7 colour touch screen display The advanced user interface fully graphic can be directly accessed by the touch screen display and allows to manage all device functions IMODO is not only a sophisticated video door phone unit which allows to manage besides traditional video door phone features also other functions offered by Pervoice system With additional LAN or WiFi connections it is possible to connect to the apartment local network to perform VoIP calls and navigate the Internet thanks to the embedded web browser To operate the t
30. nt nel ils scant Sn Stair code 5 1 aa 1 E nE Blocks 2 a Frese exc Se eT EE Ae east Bock gt Default path images e fA main Bic JSS SSS aes S eS SS SS5555 SEER E ve Bock pe S Call buttons Callbuton Coat Vest Star ame o Secondary cal module H Secondary entry panel aa Gateway West Tower a amp Floors Confirm Cancel Figure 102 Advanced Configuration Stairs preset commands 9 9 1 DEFAULT PATH IMAGES This features helps the visitor to reach the Block where the called apartment is located For each call module associated to the stair an image can be selected this image will be shown on the display when the door is opened to let the visitor in The image will usually be a graphic map i e a plan used to highlight the path to be followed to reach the desired block Further details about apartment configuration are in the chapter Apartment advanced configuration on page 172 and following 152 Import an image Browse Clear West Entrance Call Module F Import an image Browse Clear _ Call buttons Call button v Spe cial functions Confirm Cancel Figure 103 Configurazione avanzata scale Impostazione mappe grafiche predefinite The configuration page will contain a list of the call modules where the plan can be set Figure 103 See the following table to receive information to set required parameters
31. odule IP Reading Head i dade 1039 88 z VolP T lephone Concierge Switchboard 4501 5 IP System Server 1039 41 1039 1 Figure 3 The External Level the IP network The topology used is typical for LAN networks that is star point to point The star centres are constituted by PoE switches 1039 44 or 1039 45 that also carry out the function of Power Over Ethernet for many Pervoice devices The maximum allowed length for each segment is 100m in compliance with IEEE 802 3 regulations To cover longer distances and satisfy the requirements of large buildings segments in POF Plastic Optical Fibre or FO Optical Fibre can also be installed in the first 14 Per VOICE case the fibre is made of plastic that is more economical but does not reach long distances in the second case the fibre is made of glass and allows considerable distances 4 1 1 THE IP DEVICES On the IP network of IPervoice there are many devices that have different characteristics and features Some of them are optional and depend on the required features some are fundamental for the correct operation of the whole system One of them for example is the system server 1039 1 that coordinates and manages many services provided by IPervoice Other devices are as follows e Call modules made of tempered glass or vandal resistant steel they incorporate a colour camera a 3 5 TFT display and a proximity key reader for access control e Video d
32. see the paragraph IP Apartments Configuration on page Name Floor Code Fi Apartment list Name Code Apartmentt At Apartment A Confirm Cancel Figure 135 Apartment selection by respective Floor 182 Per VOICE 11 2 ADDING AN APARTMENT To add an apartment to a 4 user decoder click the button Add apartment under Apartment List as shown in Figure 134 W Note The function Add apartment is only available if there are currently one or more free outputs on the selected 4 user decoder The FrontEnd displays the data entry page as shown in Figure 136 Because this paragraph concerns the minimum data that allows IPervoice to manage a new apartment only the parameters concerning the Basic Info section of the configuration page will be described The other functions will be described later in the section Apartment advanced configuration on page 185 Name Pe Topological code B2 S1 F1 Bi Decoder port number 0 DER DE Ua aria Ci ton aaa Figure 136 Apartments configuration adding an apartment The following table shows the data to be entered After entering the desired values press the button Confirm to permanently save the information 183 i er VOICE Name Apartment name Required field Maximum length 32 characters Topological code It is the apartment unique code The user must specify the Floor by selecting it from the pull dow
33. the Pervoice system IP devices following the best pre ordered sequence and leading the user through a series of steps to be performed To make the system functions active it will be necessary at the end of Wizard to configure the single devices with additional settings W Multi Site When the system is in Multi Site mode the StartUp Wizard is not available So it is suggested when possible to use the StartUp Wizard during system configuration preliminary phase before activating the Multi Site support or before adding the new system into the Multi Site installation 93 IPERVOICE 2 0 Mozilla Firefox x File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia Segnalibri Strumenti Aiuto C xX AS http 192 168 1 1 PHP StartupWizard php ir S Googie P A Pi visitati Come iniziare A Ultime notizie Disattiva Cookies J CSS Moduli Immagini Informazioni Varies gt Contona 2 4 Ridimensiona g Strumenti gt Visualizza sorgente IPERVOICE 2 0 Introduction Site configuration Gateway Call module Entry panel Door phone IF This Wizard aims to create the first configuration tree only TCPIIP devices IP Alarm IF The server at startup automatically detects any TCP IP devices installed all the devices are at root level Switchboard Video server IP Lift interface Key reader Special decoder Voip phone End of wizard seam Completato Fiddler OFF auto
34. ATA interface will reboot with the new settings 117 Service Domain Settings You could set information of serace domains in this page Realm 1 Default Active 20On Of Display Name voip User Name voip Register Name voip Register Password Domain Server 192 168 1 1 Proxy Server 192 168 1 1 Outbound Proxy Subscribe for MWI On Off Status Not Registered Figure 67 VoIP Telephone 4501 5 SIP server settings The VoIP telephone allows max 3 different SIP servers to be registered to use this telephone with the IPervoice system fill in only the fields concerning the first server Realm 1 The settings are shown in Figure 67 the data to be entered is indicated in the following table Active Display Name User Name Register Name Register Password Domain Server Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Subscribe for MWI Select the option On Enter the voip value during the configuration phase IPervoice will set the correct value Enter the voip value during the configuration phase IPervoice will set the correct value Enter the voip value during the configuration phase IPervoice will set the correct value Leave the field empty Enter IPervoice server IP address 192 168 1 1 Enter IPervoice server IP address 192 168 1 1 Leave the field empty Select the option Off Table 28 VoIP Telephone 4501 5 Service Domain Settings VoIP 4501 5 telephone allows registratio
35. Call RPC The RPCSS service is the Service Control Started Automatic Network 5 Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator In Windows 2003 and earher versions of Manual Network 5 Remote Registry Enables remote users to modify registry Manual Local Service Routing and Remote Access Offers routing services to businesses in Disabled Local Syste oy RPC Endpoint Mapper Resolves RPC interfaces identifier tetra Started Aubornatic Network 5 fafe_apache Apache 2 2 11 Win32 PHP 5 2 9 2 Started Automatic Local Syste id safe mys ld Started Automatic Local Syste a Secondary Logan Enables starting processes under alterna Manual Local Syste e secure Socket Tunneling Protocol Senice Provides support for the Secure Socket T Maral Local Service A Security Accounts Manacer The startup of this service signals others Started Automatic Local Syste c Security Center The WSCSVC Windows Secunty Center Started Automatic D Local Service ar Server Supports file pont and named pipe sha Started Automat Local Syste This procedure refers to Windows 7 operating system for other Windows operating systems it could be different 282 Per VOICE 14 5 STARTING THE APPLICATION If all previously described steps have been successful lperVoice sa fe is ready to be used There are two different ways to start the application gt Select the item SWITCH TO MOBILE from IPervoice FrontEnd main menu gt D
36. Check System consistency checking of firmware versions on the configured devices e Upgrade system firmware update of the IPervoice server firmware e Backup and Restore backup and restore of the system configuration data also available in MAINTENANCE menu UPDATE SYSTEM System data update SWITCH TO MOBILE MODE Switch of FrontEnd operating mode Mobile and Server REBUILD ADDRESS BOOKS Rebuild of residents address books REBOOT IPervoice server reboot LOGOUT Exit from Frontend In Multi Site systems some main menu FrontEnd items will not be enabled if operating outside a specific site for instance when the function Time Profile Access Door Profiles or External person groups is selected Disabled items will be the following WIZARD DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE Y Vv V WV REBOOT 89 8 2 3 DEVICES TREE On the left side of Frontend user interface the system hierarchical structure is shown associated to a list of system configuration functions Beside each item there is an icon to make the identification easier At the top of the list there is the name assigned to the system in this specific example Technical Guide System that is the starting root then the items allowing the access to the respective functions are displayed Because the structure is a tree each menu item can contain other items as in Blocks shown in the figure on the left This condition is represented by the icon besid
37. Confirm the operation by pressing the button Yes if there are names already present they will be updated with the new data of the import file This procedure doesn t perform any deletion operation but it is only possible to add new names or update the existing ones This is important because it is possible to perform incremental import and split this operation by building or area At the end of the procedure a page will inform the user about the result of the operation as shown in Figure 233 Import data Importation report Import resident Mancini Henry Checked ok to adding data Import resident Spielberg Steven Checked ok to adding data Import external Malcovich John Checked ok to adding data Import external Travolta John Checked ok to adding data All data has been successfully imported in database Back to main page Figure 233 System Maintenance Data import result W Warning lf during the import process there are one or more rows with wrong data the system will notify the user about wrong rows and fields without making any change in the system 268 13 10 SYSTEM LOG IPervoice system records operating information in an event log To see this information by the FrontEnd Per VOICE select the item Log from the main menu Figure 234 displays an example of the summary page that shows the contents EJ Log Delete log Page number 0 lt lt lt G G gt 3
38. Figure 116 Database Manager configuration file download This operation is needed each time a configuration file is downloaded to the PDA Once this operation has been completed the Database Manager application can be closed and the main application SoftWMobile can be launched again to start the programming procedure 165 Per VOICE DEVICE SELECTION AND SYSTEM DATA DOWNLOAD Every time system data must be downloaded to column devices the Bluetooth interface 1039 56 must be connected to the device to be configured Figure 117 Bluetooth programming interface For the connection use the provided cable without down powering the device to be programmed If the connection is correct the green led on the interface near the connector turns on The procedure used to download configuration data to a column device for example a 4 user decoder is very easy First of all select the Block or Stair in which the device to be programmed is included from the devices tree click twice on the Block and then on the Stair step 1 of Figure 118 A list will be displayed that shows the IP gateway and all the associated 4 user decoders Click twice on the desired decoder step 2 to select it Now it can be programmed With a Windows Mobile PDA upper side of the figure by clicking on the item MENU and on WRITE TO BT step 3 the download procedure is activated with a Symbian PDA select the item Options and then
39. Figure 186 show these operations Group ID 9 Name AllPlots Confirm Cancel Name Athletes Village NO3 FW3 0 Athletes Village NO7 FW3 0 Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 Athletes Village N15 FW 3 0 Plot NO1 Plot NO2 Plot NO3 Plot NO4 Figure 183 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration List of servers where the External Group Is present In Multi Site system as shown in Figure 183 if selecting the Group also servers sites in which the group is defined are displayed Click on the site name to access the detail page shown in Figure 185 where it is possible to add new users or change the current ones 225 CREATING A NEW GROUP Name Maintenance group Cancel Figure 184 Advanced functions configuration Adding an external person group Name Group name required alphanumeric field Max length 32 characters Lift associated to lf there are one or more Lift interfaces configured in the system as for External person group example 1039 37 it is possible to specify the blocks and the floors where the access is enabled for that group 226 CREATION OR CHANGING A GROUP IN MULTI SITE MODE Group ID 9 Name AiiPiots LIFTS a iated to external person gro W Block1 gt Stair 4 Block SWI gt Stair SWI AlPiots persons starting with Ox AlPiots persons starting with 1 AlPiots persons starting with 2 AlPiots persons starting with 3s
40. IP riser network Internal wiring To IP apartments Ti Switch 4 4 PoE Ports Saas 1039 44 to IP Network External wiring Figure 4 The internal level building IP riser typical solution It is possible to connect other Ethernet switches to the first one if the number of switch ports is not sufficient 24 i er VOICE In the second case the figure shows a minimal solution that can be used when the number of apartments is limited In this way the number of devices is lower allowing to reduce system costs and consumption ESP gata eh Dad als Te Sa ls a A oa NT oO E A i a OI a SI e Ga A A AI TS SOR A a se a a Internal wiring minimal IP riser network Legend ames P Network External wiring P PoE Network Internal wiring Switch 2 4 PoE Ports ae 1039 45 S To single IP apartment 2 bs To single IP apartment g To single IP apartment a To single IP apartment to IP Network External wiring Figure 5 The internal level building IP riser reduced solution 25 4 3 THE INTERNAL LEVEL THE DEDICATED CATS RISER COLUMNS At the base of every building or of each stair if inside the building there is more than one stair an IP Gateway is located from which the riser starts This column is used to perform the signal distribution inside the apartments The topology used for wiring is BUS type to make the laying of cables easier a
41. SITE MODE The page shown after login has the above described structure with different contents when in Multi Site mode As shown in Figure 36 the functions tree indicated by number 2 has a different structure the site is not the first element of the list but a part of the Multi Site system The root is one of the features extended to all the system and is managed in a centralized mode regardless of the site The central area of the page indicated by number 3 shows the related detailed content i m i E felon if im eo 1 Fasl PIOI LA PH reiresh 1 ileeps0 O PERVOICE 3 0 Build 098 16 x jei y o 10 1 1 1 set php PHPSESSID IHT ded bl brez SG abeoedl7 3 SS Google PA D n A pr Tegi PE wl m M aya Sn Tus ogee oe pee REFRESH an e SAV LOG SEARCH SOFTWARE FW UPGRADE UPDATE EOL ii Teme Profile Aters I C Time Profis Beer i p Heitir 4 cy Looeea Profile rn Oe a r Profiles TATE or aii ani er ternal person grown Fjes E eigen Papi Amies Wage NEJI Po Amies Vilage HET PWA a a F a a a I APetee Y Bage Wie PYTA op De o n d o Amines Vispa HISIA LE Pist Mgt a 4 s a i ir Fora Sa Fa Fa raf R L T a Figure 36 Multi Site mode Frontend User interface 87 8 2 2 THE MAIN MENU From the main menu the following functions can be accessed REFRESH WIZARD DIAGNOSTIC MAINTE
42. Server 1 10 1 11 1 Test 3 1 Server 2 10 1 12 1 Test 3 1 Server 3 10 1 13 1 W B a 8 fe amp is Back to main page Figure 204 System maintenance System configuration backup in multi site mode procedure completed 247 Per VOICE 13 2 RESTORE OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DATA To restore configuration data saved with the backup procedure select the item MAINTENANCE from the FrontEnd main menu and then Backup and Restore Select Restore all data from a previous backup and press the button Next to start the restore procedure The installer must select the file with the data to be restored as shown in Figure 205 Press the button Browse to open a dialog window and select the desired file Restore all data from a previous backup Select the saved configuration file to restore This file must be a TAR file Browse Figure 205 System maintenance System configuration restore backup file selection After the selection IPervoice will load the file on the server and restore operations will start At the end the user is notified about the operation result to complete the procedure the last operation to be performed is a complete manual reboot by switching off and on all the IP system devices Restore all data from a previous backup Restore has succeeded Figure 206 System maintenance System configuration restore operation completed W Warning It
43. Stair eS Secondary call module E 2 eed Secondary entry panel Z i Gateway West Tower A amp eRe w Hy Dacodert A Decoder2 Ex bes Decoders ROA D Decoderd Ez Elun internace Figure 226 System maintenance Selection of a device to be deleted To delete a device click on the button Delete near the device the system will require a confirmation Figure 227 if the answer is Yes the device will be deleted Do you confirm to delete the decoder No Figure 227 System maintenance confirmation to delete a device 264 Per VOICE If in the system there are other devices or components connected to the device to be deleted Pervoice informs the user that the operation is impossible explaining why the deleting operation has not been performed W Warning 13 7 2 DELETING OTHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS the FrontEnd provides details only about the direct cause that prevents from deleting the device For example a decoder deleting depends on the presence of apartments associated to it where there could be other devices as video door phones or intercom interfaces and also residents associated to that apartment The user must first of all delete all these devices in the right sequence and then delete the main device The procedure is the same select from the devices tree the component to be deleted and click on Delete to delete it To verify if other devices depend on that component foll
44. Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Return to Server mode consistency check Also in this case the user will be asked to confirm data synchronization or change mode switching without any modifications The dialog window Figure 252 and options are the same described in paragraph 14 5 1 on page 284 123A temporary return to server mode without data synchronization can be necessary if operations requiring the connection to IPervoice server must be performed diagnostic log reading etc 286 Per VOICE 14 6 THE MAIN MENU lperVoice sa fe main menu is a subset of the one available on IPervoice FrontEnd The following table describes the available functions and their meaning REFRESH It executes the forced update of page contents SEARCH It activates the search functions available in IPervoice for example search of a resident or a device by topological or logic code by key code and so on W Warning the search is performed in lperVoice sa fe local database SWITCH TO SERVER MODE Back to Server mode On line Mode EDIT DATA It forces system data editing when the database is read only LOGOUT Exit from FrontEnd Stand Alone 14 7 APPLICATION STRUCTURE AND FUNCTIONS Stand Alone FrontEnd is a version of the FrontEnd described in chapter IPervoice Configuration The Frontend on page 85 and following It operates independently from IPervoice system server For this reason the user that already knows the FrontEnd application th
45. To facilitate the use in case of need the radio transmitter can be hung around the neck of the person that needs help 57 Per VOICE ACTIVATION DEACTIVATION PRIORITY ENGAGE As above described room monitor activation is performed by the switchboard attendant after the communication has been established this can be interrupted only by the attendant that has activated it the off hook button on the apartment station has not any effect Room monitor priority is the highest available in the system because it must not be interrupted by any other audio or video communications for further information Call priority Call pickup time and Guaranteed conversation time on page 46 If more than one Switchboard is defined in the system the alarm will be sent to all the switchboards belonging to the same competence area Only the switchboard who will activate room monitor will take charge of managing the alarm silencing the acoustic signal on the other switchboards no one is entitled to reset or re activate room monitor for this alarm Any other alarms received from other apartments may be handled by other switchboards 5 5 LOCAL ACTIVATIONS SERVICE This service allows to activate relay outputs according to events that can occur in IPervoice system The devices with usable relays are the special decoder modules 1039 80 that have two independent relay outputs also associated to two inputs which allow the local cont
46. W Note itis suggested to assign to each camera an identifier which contains also the reference to the belonging module so it will be easier to identify the camera during selection Number Video input number The value can be selected from the pull down menu Available values are 0 1 2 3 Table 34 Advanced Configuration Configuration data of the camera associated to the Video Server 9 6 IPKEY READER The IP key reader has no direct parameters to be configured As for the call module the door controlled by the device must be added to the configuration to allow its opening To add a door after selecting the item Key Readers and the desired device from the devices tree click the button Add a door in the upper side of the page Figure 95 t T Technical Guide System H a Time Profiles oc Primary call module A amp Primary entry panel nE Blocks Name arage Access Reader Lift interface z a Key readers A Garage Access Reader G H IP address 192 168 2 7 MAC address 00 1E E0 00 10 C0 New device E o special decoders FW version 0 0 0 1 D J Switchboards Device status ALIVE Polling GIP VolP phones H W Video servers i External person groups eT Sy Confirm Reboot Cancel Figure 95 Advanced configuration IP key reader 144 Per VOICE Setting and entry modes are the same as those described in the chapter IPer
47. a Stair and so they are connected to an IP gateway To select the device to be configured identify the IP gateway to which the lift interface is associated expand the item Lift Interface that contains this type of devices and click on the desired module Figure 129 afe Technical Guide System Ei Lift list C rima Proisa Moun Primary call module primary entry penei E A0 Blocks mie Liti L1 Ernie Linz Lz Drai n East Block mi Man Block E nl West Block Westi Stair Ga i l mi i iE i B i lt ib A m i it teh CC D oS Floors Figure 129 Lift Interface Configuration Devices List 176 Per VOICE Lift Relay Path Name Lif Code L1 Status UNKNOWN Polling Confirm Cancel Figure 130 Lift Interface Configuration Main configuration data The display shows the configuration page similar to that shown in Figure 130 besides main data shown in the following table to complete the configuration perform the following two operations gt Creation of access path gt Association of command relays Name Name assigned to the lift interface required field Maximum length 32 characters Code Device unique alphanumeric code composed according to the respective gateway Required field Fixed length 2 alphanumeric characters ex L1 01 1L etc Status Device operating status detected by the system The status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS
48. a valid door code increased by one unit e g door code 123456 associated hold up 123457 Selection of Door lock release time profile if available see paragraph Time Bands on page 62 The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains the previously programmed profiles if present For information about time profiles refer to chapter Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Access on page 214 Default value No time profile applied If selected it allows to define the validity start date of door lock release code Before this date the code will not open the passage Default value Not selected If selected it allows to define the validity end date of door lock release code After this date the code will not open the passage Default value Not selected If selected the door lock release code will be disabled and will not allow to open the passage Default value Not selected Selection of doors enabled to be opened If the check box at the top of the list is selected the doors of all devices are enabled then those of a specific device type and so on Table 48 Door Code configuration Meaning of data 195 11 4 3 KEY CODE CONFIGURATION Pe r VOICE Using the same method one or more passages can be opened with a proximity key model 1125 50 In this case a key is associated to the selected resident It is possible to select doors related to call modules as for door codes
49. alphanumeric code of the respective floor Fixed length 2 alohanumeric characters e g 01 V1 1V VT W Note itis suggested to create a virtual Block Stair and Floor where all the system telephones will be included For example Block Common Devices CD Stair VoIP phones VP Floor VoIP Floor VF Table 29 VoIP telephone identification data if alohanumeric codes have been used to identify blocks stairs floors apartments and so on these cannot be directly called from the 4501 5 telephone keypad In this case it is necessary to program the telephone directory or the speed dialing numbers of each telephone Please refer to IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration VoIP Telephone on page 149 121 Per voice 8 3 11 END OF CONFIGURATION WITH STARTUP WIZARD By clicking the button Next page the StartUp Wizard displays the page that informs the user that the guided configuration has been completed By pressing the button Back to main page the browser goes back to the main page Here it will possible to access to the single devices to complete the configuring operations as previously described File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia SegnalibriStramenti Aiuto a X A hittpyy192 168 1 1 PHP StartupWizard php view END E Pi visitati Come iniziare Ultime notizie Disattive Cookie CSS E Moduli Immagini Informazioni gt Varie s Contona Ridimensiona g Strum
50. and automatically detect the presence of PoE compatible devices The switch provides a total of 32W on the 4 PoE ports that powers all the IPervoice system devices designed for PoE standard W Warning More than 2 call modules 1039 13 or 1039 14 cannot be connected to one switch 22 4 PoE ports 2 Ethernet ports Switch 1039 45 The switch 1039 45 is composed by two parts power supply and PoE switch The PoE switch is provided with Power over Ethernet PoE function has 6 ports and can operate both in 100Mbps Fast Ethernet and in 10Mbps Ethernet The ports from 1 to 4 use the PoE standard and automatically detect the presence of PoE compatible devices The switch provides a total of 15 4W for each PoE port that Main technical characteristics can power all the Pervoice system devices designed for PoE Switch standard 4 x 10 100 Mbit s PoE Ethernet ports able to provide 15 4 W each port 2 x 10 100 Mbit s Ethernet ports Power supply 48 Vdc Operating temperature range 10 60 C Dimensions 45 W x 140 H x 95 P mm Installation DIN rail Power Supply Input 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz Output 48 Vdc 1 6 A Dimensions 55 W x 125 H x 100 D mm Installation DIN rail Special Decoder 1039 80 The special decoder 1039 80 is used in the IPervoice system to activate two electric loads with double pole relays that can operate in bistable or timed monostable mode The device is directly connect
51. and its status W Note The IPervoice server automatically detects the new IP devices when these require the assignment of the address However the list can be manually updated by pressing the button Detect new devices under New Device With the fields Device Type and MAC address the device to be replaced can be uniquely identified in the example a call module press the button Replace to start the replacement procedure REFRESH STARTUP WIZARD DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE _ SRV LOG SEARCH SOFTWAREUSER FW UPGRADE REBUILD REBOOT LOGOUT 4 F Technical Guide System Y wH Time Profiles e o Primary call module Primary entry panel E iF Blocks Edip un KEEL Key readers os Special decoders OF switchboards CH voip phonesy E video segfrs zo Exterpdl person groups New device E P Zones Figure 217 System maintenance List of new IP devices t To access to the IPervoice FrontEnd see the chapter The Frontend on page 47 257 Per VOICE The FrontEnd shows the user a new page where information about the new device are displayed section 1 of Figure 218 and the list of call modules with DEAD status section 2 that must be replaced In case of call module replacement there are two lists the first for main modules and the second for the secondary ones The user must select the module to be replaced from the right list the system can not automatically choose Once the device has been i
52. backbones and building risers or mixed mode IP network for backbones and CAT5 network for risers or hybrid mode IP for backbones IP and CATS for risers e All the IPervoice devices present on the IP network except VoIP telephones and the concierge switchboard are directly powered through the data cable via PoE Power Over Ethernet Also for this reason the installation is simpler and more economical e The possibility of using optical fibre to cover long distances means that IPervoice does not have distance limits between the IP network devices AUDIO AND VIDEO QUALITY e As already described IPervoice uses the H 264 standard as video codec The result is a high quality IPervoice digital video with 30 frame sec that gives the images excellent fluidity e Inthe same way the audio streams are dealt at maximum speed according to G 711 standards EXPANDABILITY The use of the digital technology allows IPervoice to be unlimited with regards to e P network extension and distances the use of optical fibre is supported e Number of riser columns e Number of concierge switchboards e Number of connectable users e Number of simultaneous conversations a fundamental requirement in large residential complexes 3 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair 11 Per VOICE If a dedicated CAT5 network has been chosen in each building and for each riser column the system can be expanded up to e 900 metres for each riser column e 1080 users
53. be performed off line without being connected to the system and then transferred to IPervoice server gt User interface accessible by Internet browser compatible with the interface used by the FrontEnd in Server mode gt Bluetooth programming of column devices embedded in the application gt Addition and configuration of new IP devices in offline mode gt System database synchronization at each operating mode switching Server or Mobile Even though it is not mandatory it is suggested to install IPervoice sa fe application on a laptop notebook or Netbook in order to have on the same PC the FrontEnd features used to configure the system and the SmartPhone features used for column devices programming see chapter Column Devices Configuration on page 157 and following 114 it can be freely downloaded also from URMET Internet site www urmet com In order to use the embedded programming functions for column devices the PC must be provided with Bluetooth interface and use Internet Explorer 8 or higher 115 278 Per VOICE 14 1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Before installation check that the PC is provided with the following minimum requirements gt Processor 1 GHz 32 bit x86 Core Duo compatible with Microsoft Windows Vista 32 bit Home Premium or Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit Home Premium Professional or Ultimate gt RAM and disk space 1 Gbyte RAM and 250 Mbyte of availa
54. button Next to access the detail page to enter the required configuration data Required data and their meaning are summarized in Table 27 on page 113 Last Name West Block Main comdor IP address 192 168 2 5 MAC address 00 4E E0 00 10 98 FW version 2 64 1 0 Device status ALIVE Previous Next Figure 61 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new Special Decoder Backtomainpage Name Device identifier required field Maximum length 32 characters IP address IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the special decoder MAC address Device unique physical address Used to distinguish devices during configuration procedure FW version Application firmware version of the special decoder Device status Device status detected by the system the status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Table 27 Special Decoder configuration data 113 Per VOICE 8 3 10 VolP TELEPHONE CONFIGURATION IPervoice system allows to connect VoIP devices in two different modes using VolP 4501 5 digital telephone or VoIP ATA 4501 30 interface which allows to transform a standard analog telephone into a VoIP telephone In both cases before configuration perform a preliminary procedure to register the device to the SIP server present in IPervoice server This operation is necessary to make telephones visible in the list of new devices shown by the FrontEnd PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS FOR VO
55. distance of 900 metres a power supply unit must be installed every 100 metres CAT5 Riser distributor 1039 54 The riser distributor 1039 54 is connected to the column BUS and allows the distribution of up to 4 riser columns The following devices can be connected to its outputs e 4 user decoders 1039 34 e Lift interfaces 1039 37 e Column power supply units 1039 20 28 Main technical characteristics 2 x CATS RJ45 ports for the connection to the analogue riser column BUS IN BUS OUT 4 x CATS RJ45 ports for the distribution in the apartments 4 floor call inputs FC1 FC4 1 output for auxiliary alarm signalling AL 1 optional audio channel A2 IN A2 OUT 1 connector dedicated for the Bluetooth programming interface 1039 56 Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption in standby 1 mA 35 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 108 W x 142 H x 37 D mm Installation wall mounting or in flush mounting box Main technical characteristics 2 x CATS RJ45 ports for the connection to the analogue riser column BUS IN BUS OUT 24 relay outputs max C NC NO 30 V 1A 1 connector dedicated for the Bluetooth programming interface 1039 56 Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption in standby 1 mA 10 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 216 W x 80 H x 90 D mm 12 DIN modules Installation DIN rail 4 user decoder for CAT5 1039 34 The d
56. i A r Primary entry panel dress x Delete Company Delete Fly Blocks nl F Fi P Lif al Key readers F o o Specul decoders aT Switthboards j IP VoF phones rs ass Video servers ry z External person groups New d ewte Zones y jiii iA User custom fields ate Agdress A Company Figure 188 Advanced functions configuration User custom fields list Previously entered fields are shown in the list in the centre of the page to change one of them click on the name to add a new field select Add new User Custom Field under the title W Multi Site because User custom fields are part of extended functions adding or changing these data will affect all the sites in Multi Site system 231 Per VOICE Press the button Add new User Custom Field the FrontEnd will open the page used to enter change data as shown in Figure 189 Label Title Type String value iy Max length 32 Mandatory Confirm Cancel Figure 189 Advanced functions configuration Entering Custom fields The following table describes the concerned fields and shows usage limits Label Custom field identifier required field Max length 32 characters Type Data type It can be selected from the pull down menu values e String value alohanumeric field all printable characters are allowed e Integervalue Numeric field only integers from O to 9 are allowed Default value S
57. installation procedure so it could be necessary to disable the antivirus software during installation It is suggested to disable or configure properly firewall software if present in order to use properly IPervoice sa fe In case of problems during access with Internet browser the firewall must be disabled IPervoice sa fe software uses an Active X control inside Internet Explorer browser to communicate with Bluetooth devices so it is needed to enable download and execution of unsigned Active X controls in order to make the application operate properly To enable this function from Internet Explorer main menu select the item Tools gt Internet options gt Security then Local Intranet and Custom level activate the option Download unsigned Active x controls Figure 246 Opnoni internet Connesso Progamm Avariate Genera Surerze Pracy Contenuto Gelenonare Tarea di ou vsusirioe o modicae be SDi E Q W f Impostazioni di sicurezza Arga Intranet locale Internet Intranetiocale S5 attend imposter Mose Wed e senang meie pagne Wen Oe non utgIano un a Intranet locale Attiva Area rnpervata tutt i sh Web suia E Ceative rete intanet y Pocheeste d conferna sutemabea per contat Acted a Ativa Disattiva Leio Gi sicurerre per lares Soaic conio Actes con frma elettronica Liei combent per gusia arrear Tuta Alva Medio batea G Ched conferma ipo ianone appropriata pe Death Ah
58. is connected Figure 134 The same operation must be performed to add a new apartment to an existing decoder 181 a Technical Guide System Ez Irme Profiles E primary call module Primary entry panel E InP Blocks i Fn cast Block nF Main Block E nl west Block H west Stair nE Secondary call module M H E E Secondary entry panel Be hes Gateway West Tower _ Tovar oon 8 Apartment E hot Decoder 5 o Decoders Apartment BHn Decoder name Decodernumber 1 Device status ALIVE Polling J Confirm Reboot Cancel Name Code Apartmentt At Delete Apartment AJ Delete Figure 134 Apartment selection by 4 user decoder In the second case identify the desired floor inside the respective block stair then apartments are displayed as shown in Figure 135 W Warning The function Add IP apartment shown in the page is used to add an apartment equipped with IP devices only This function will be soon available at the moment to add an apartment select the 4 user decoder For further information about IP 209 ote Technical Guide System E time Profiles Primary call module primary entry panel E im Biocks fii East Bloc nf Main Block 5 Aa West Block D weet stair H Secondary call module a Secondary entry panel Galeway Eastlower ay D e Floors a a L Aparnmenti mt L Apartment apartment configuration
59. n a E E A O A Teer te ere 143 OG TPKE Reade E nsei E A A E AO 144 g6 Special Fun UON S sss cee ccesavasa eee ceric cc saccades soccer eee casa neeete 145 OF SSS Cla DSC OC Sia sarc so covatncratiocamsecaaaae Sec scr da atraatanet E nseaaaaretananannodaaensast 146 10 11 12 9 8 9 9 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 1 L 2 113 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 12 1 VolP TeleBRON E anne rene nce ee eee ene ew ow rare ni On E rE eee re rn ror nr ee 149 Stairs Preset COMMA S xcces ieee deccnetid ets E ECEE EE EEEE AAA 152 S94 DeO P A a ee 152 S92 PCA UNOS sia E E 153 O93 lt SpecialtPunChOnsucis 2 eee ee ee eee ee eee 155 Column DEVICES Configuration ssssssssssssssosssssssosssssoosssesssossessossssessosssssssossssssssossessoose 157 Column DEVICES Programming ssss rraian aa ee E eaa ETna rE E eTa 157 10 L1 SontMobilesoftware Instalati Mnseninnn eke Ge een a name Rees eee 158 10 1 2 System Data Download to PDA and Smartphone device ccc cccccccccccseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeess 160 10 1 3 Download of system data to column ACEVICES ccc ccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesssseeeeseeeeeees 162 10 1 4 Parameters for column devices configuration cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesseeseeeeeeeeeess 173 4 user Decoders coneuratio Meana E a 175 Litt Interface Configuration esis npr a aa EN IAr Aa 176 Apartments Configuration sessssssssss
60. o E E e m lgi Te o a LAN Switch w PoE Ports LAN Switch w PoE Ports Gateway IP CATS Gateway IP CAT5 External wiring IP Network Figure 2 System architecture External and internal levels of the building If CAT5 network solution is used for buildings the communication between the two levels is made by dedicated devices called Gateway IP CAT5 which transfer data and audio video streams adapting them to the respective requirements 13 Per VOICE 4 1 THE EXTERNAL LEVEL THE IP NETWORK The framework of IPervoice is made by the IP network used to connect all the digital devices of the system On the external level of IPervoice devices that perform operations concerning the building structure instead of the single building are usually present For the laying of the network a cable available on the market can be used provided that it is CAT5 certified Urmet provides the installer with a special CAT5 cable 1039 90 protected by a reinforced black sheath that allows the coexistence between the CATS cable for Pervoice and 230V cables in the same ducts allowing also the use in cable pipes outside the building typically road pipes af tin hia EE i bia EE IP Riser Column CATS Riser Column ET i Gateway IP CATS gi i 1039 50 sad Switch 4 4 PoE Ports 1039 44 Gaa ay Fa Dmr aa FO or POF extension l IP Call M 1039 14 External wiring IP Network
61. of the page the system will show the list of profiles configured for call modules in the lower side the list of IP key readers 1039 88 To add a new profile press the button Add a door profile under the title of the desired category ahe Technical Guide Sysiem z7 ka Time Profile Access CY Access Proties Cai Door Pr fil s Name k raii Door Profies Cal Module as Door Profies Key Reader o Primary cal module aa cf Primary entry panel a Fey Blocks Fi P Lin Name 5 cal Key readers Key Reader Door Profie Delete Figure 177 Advanced functions configuration List of doors profiles g Time Profile Access cs Cc Access Profiles E e Door Profiles E3 mall Door Profiles Call Module Name ot Door Profdes Key Reader Call Module Door Profile Delete yy Switchboards i AB External person groups Bf 2 User custom fieids Po z a HE5 Athletes Vilage NO3 FW3 0 1 BSS Athletes Vilage NO7 FW3 0 Name Key Reader Door Profile Delete oo i a Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 Figure 178 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configurations Door profiles list 219 Per VOICE 12 3 1 DOOR PROFILES CALL MODULE Figure 179 shows the page used by the installer to create a new profile or change an existing profile Name Call Module door profile Type Secret Door time 1 S Door Forced Alarm Max Door Opening Time 120 5 Time profile
62. of the devices tree in Multi Site mode are the same but the hierarchical structure is different in the upper side of the page there are all the features extended to system internal level i e they operate across each site limit and are hierarchically higher on the bottom there is the list of the single sites 90 i er VOICE The first level items present on the tree structure are the following time Profi Time Profiles Cy Access Profiles a Door Profiles ooo o Primary call module Primary entry panel Aa Blocks IP Lift interface Key readers oo Special decoders Switchboards G VoIP phones lt gt Video servers amp External person group User custom fields New device amp Zones Return to Frontend main page containing identification data Functions concerning the time profiles management Passages and Users Functions for access profiles management doors and users Functions concerning door management Call modules and IP key readers Management of Primary Call Modules 1039 13 and 1039 14 present in the system Management of Primary IP video entry panels 1039 72 Management of the system topologic structure Buildings Stairs Floors of associated devices including the secondary call modules 1039 13 and 1039 14 and the residents Configuration of IP lift interface modules Management of IP key readers 1039 88 Configuration of Special Decoder Modules 1039
63. output on Forced Alarm Hot assigned ons oma iiot assigned Outputs Contr Ganco Figure 79 Advanced configuration Adding a new pedestrian door to the IP Call Module 130 Name Number Door Profile Hame Vehicle entrance gate Humber 1 Gate Door profile Custom Type Secret Boor time 2 s Door Forced Alarm Max Door Opening Time i 30 s Time profile rin E min Not assigned Outputs Dune output on Forced Alarm Not assigned Outputs 2 fot assigned Outputs Confirm Cancel Figure 80 Advanced configuration Adding a new vehicle entrance gate to the IP Call Module Door identifier alohanumeric required field Maximum length 32 characters Number of the door of the call module The value can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are 0 MainDoor 1 Gate W Warning the door number O MainDoor must be used to activate a pedestrian door electrical lock terminal pins SE SE if capacitive type or terminal pins C NO NC if the call module relay is used The door number 1 Gate is used to open a vehicle entrance gate terminal pins SE2 SE2 This opening must always be performed by an automation equipment control unit dedicated to this purpose In no case the opening must be directly activated Selection of door profile if available The value can be selected from a pull down menu For information about door profile definition refer to chapter Ad
64. phones inside apartments it is suggested to follow the instructions shown in the Figure 29 1740 1 1717 1 1139 2 1740 40 1 55 m 1 55m Figure 29 Devices installation Apartment stations installation 18 Per VOICE 7 5 VIDEO SIGNAL ADJUSTMENT Before riser startup the video signal must be adjusted This procedure is used to ensure the correct signal level of all system devices To adjust the video signal the installer must do all necessary electrical connections once this operation is completed he must follow the procedure below 3 Put the riser to be adjusted in Video adjustment mode to do this on the IP Gateway 1039 50 press the button placed on the gateway top to activate the test signal The red led on the button starts blinking to indicate that test mode is active Test LED Test Switch 4 Perform the following adjustment operations starting from the 1039 20 power supply nearest to the gateway up to the most distant 5 Press the bistable button used for adjustment operations on the power supply top to switch on the bicolour led red green the button will stay pressed _ fe ite ie Ce Ar ninapoona H Sji I Test HAr Sch 107920 i H t fai 20 2 l HH HH LED ua enli al sa so OHI x PRI FETI REW A j _ veo onan LT namen gO ean Test a eh Button UGC I IB OREMI NIMC BURT ot HHHMH Ooi nmin iio rarer ar al 5 0 O 6 O I MT cicisis AESA i 4 78 Wl Yu W L
65. port as for example Microsoft IIS In this case the application will not work properly To check that the two services have been correctly started access the list of Windows services Start Windows control panel select the item Administrative tools and then the item Services scroll the list to find the two IperVoice sa fe services and check that the status column is Started as shown in Figure 248 Re Services File Action Yiew Help ioe Fl cisl Bm gt au bp 121 Figure 248 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Checking service status 1 Services Local Name Descnption Status Startup Type Log On As Program Compatibility Assistant Service This serice provides support for the Pro Manual Local Syste j Protected Storage Provides protected storage for sensitive Manual Local Syste oo Quality Windows Audio Video Expenence Quality Windows Audio Video Expenenc Manual Local Service Remote Access Auto Connection Manager Creates a connection to a remote netwo Manual Local Syste a Remote Access Connection Manager Manages dial up and virtual private net Manual Local Syste Remote Desktop Configuration Remote Desktop Configuration service Started Manual Local Syste Remote Desktop Services Allows users to connect interactively to Started Manual Network lt Remote Desktop Senices UserMode Port Redire Allows the redirection of Printers Drives Started Manual Local Syste a Remote Procedure
66. possible to load or update the internal database containing the system structure Bluetooth Makes it possible to receive the configuration through a Bluetooth connection Exit Ends the Database Manager application Database Manager application is an integral part of SoftMobile software for Symbian they are automatically installed together This function will be available in next PDA software versions 164 Per VOICE mz Database MNG th file Choice an Item FillDataBase Change Path Blue Tooth Exit Figure 115 Database Manager Application start up The first step consists of selecting the config dat file that must be saved as already described in SoftMobile software Installation on page 158 on the PDA memory card and not in the SoftWobile application folder To start this operation select the item Change Path and click OK the file search function will be activated Using this function select the folder where the config dat file was previously downloaded After this operation the application will go back to the main screen by highlighting the item Fill Database confirm to make SoftMobile application data available The images of Figure 116 show the two steps required for loading mz Path of Files me Database MNG Memory card IPervoice config dat Choice an Item Fill DataBase Memoria telefono o Change Path Blue Tooth Exit status
67. profile definition Name Standard Door Profile Paste Delete Monday 08 00 13 00 14 00 20 00 Add Copy Paste Tuesday 08 00 13 00 14 00 20 00 Add Copy Paste Delete Wednesday 08 00 13 00 14 00 20 00 Add Copy Paste Delete Thursday 08 00 13 00 14 00 20 00 Add Copy Paste Delete Friday 08 00 13 00 14 00 20 00 _ Add Copy Paste Delete Saturday 08 00 13 00 Add Copy Paste Delete Sunday Add Copy Paste Delete HN Ae a Confirm Cancel Figure 170 Advanced functions configuration Adding a new door profile Name Profile name Required field Max length 32 characters Monday Tuesday Day of the week of the time profile Sunday Framel Framez2 Time bands in which the door can be opened Each band is defined by a start end time expressed in hours minutes More than one band can be defined for the same day of the week These bands must not overlap The time profile is always week based so data must be configured for each day To do this press the button Add near each day of the week after each click a Frame will be added which allows to define the valid time band The example in the figure defines two access time bands Framel1 and Frame2 for working days Monday Friday which allow to open the door from 8 a m to 1 p m and from
68. the use of the lift interface 1039 37 that allows residents to be associated to a list of floors enabled for the use of the lift By selecting the box near the name the installer can add the floors accessible to the residents Once the configuration is completed press the button Confirm to save information Figure 137 Apartment advanced configuration Setting of floors accessible by residents W Note The floor where the apartment is located in this case F1 Floor1 is shown but it cannot be de selected from the list of floors 185 11 3 2 IN THE CALLING CALL MODULE This section describes the configuration data concerning the interaction between apartment and call modules and vice versa This data is related to two main functions the first one provided by the devices 1039 13 and 1039 14 allows some apartment parameters to be changed from the door unit the second one allows a specific message to be shown to visitors that will be displayed on the call module when the resident is absent Call module password s eeeeeee _ Absence message active Absence message Import an image Browse Clear Figure 138 Apartment advanced configuration Setting of relation parameters between apartment and call modules The Table 43 shows the meaning of data to be entered Call module password A password can be used on the call module to configure some apartment functions In this field it is possible t
69. those of L2 to F12B 8 This Operation is necessary because the lift interface relays can be associated to the floor and not to the single apartment a Alternatively instead of two logic floors two stairs S1 and S2 could be defined each one with a lift interface 180 Per VOICE 11 APARTMENTS CONFIGURATION An important chapter for the IPervoice start up concerns the apartments configuration These can be connected to a CAT5 dedicated network or to an IP network according to the type of riser The system provides many functions these will be described by category starting from the device involved with use in configuration phases The following subjects will be treated gt Apartment selection gt Adding of an apartment in minimal configuration Advanced configuration of apartment functions Management of Residents associated to an apartment Apartment stations configuration Y Vv V WV Intercom interfaces configuration After the procedures used to configure traditional apartments the chapter will describe special details about management of apartments composed by IP devices 11 1 APARTMENT SELECTION To select an apartment in the devices tree two different modes are available gt Selection by the respective 4 user Decoder gt Selection by the respective Floor In the first case identify inside the block stair the IP Gateway that manages the riser column then select the 4 user decoder to which the apartment
70. to all the switchboards The number of available buttons can change according to the apartment station model the presence of additional buttons module For further information about door phone buttons please refer to the paragraph Button Function Assignment on page 62 188 Per VOICE gt Competence area switchboards The call is sent only to switchboards with competence on the apartment VoIP Phone The call is sent to the VoIP telephone selected from the pull down menu Apartment In this case the call is sent to an apartment The selection is made by entering the topological code of the apartment to be called which must be managed by the same IP gateway Table 45 Call buttons Meaning of configuration parameters 11 3 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS When an event occurs the commands performed by an apartment station directed to one or more system outputs are many and various as shown in Figure 141 Special buttons Button 1 Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Drive output on Door nin Not assigned Outputs P gt Output List Drive output on Gate Opening Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Self insertion button Not assigned 3 Outputs gt Output List TVCC cameras Main Entrance Call Modul Ru 2 N v Absence Presence button Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Alarm signal Not assigned Outputs gt Out
71. use this function connect an open door sensor to the call module It defines the max time of door opening after which a door open signal is generated Min 1 sec max 999 sec Default value Not selected W Warning to use this function connect an open door sensor to the call module Selection of Time Profile assigned to the passage if available See chapter Time Bands on page 62 The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains other profiles previously programmed For information about time profiles definition refer to chapter Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Door on page 213 Default value No time profile applied W Multi Site after changes have been performed press the button Confirm to automatically apply them to all the IPervoice servers configured in the Multi Site system If one or more sites are disconnected this state is shown by a red icon in the devices tree save operations will not be possible This because servers data would not be coherent inside the system If it is needed to operate also in such specific requirements the disconnected site must be suspended from its normal operation as described in paragraph Server Configuration in Multi Site Mode on page 240 221 Per VOICE 12 3 2 DOOR PROFILES KEY READER The page used to create and change profiles for IP key readers is similar to the one used for call modules See Figure 180
72. username root password test 116 Per VOICE username and password and press the button Login to access The browser will show the system information page Figure 66 Bile Modifica Miewsliz o Gronobrgis Segnalibri Strament Aiuto ne xe C w Pibtpe 1821681 2919008 eine gi z 4 z S Pad vigiteti Come iniiae gt Ultime notne Oicattvay d Cocke y CSS 4 Moduli D Immagini Gp infornazionie D Viie p Contomar J Ridimensiona W Strumentis Visualizza sorgi VolP Web Management ote System Information This page illusirate the system related information TEMES Model Marva Domus VolP ATA Firmware Yarsion Fri Nov 28 10 05 07 2008 810170 Phone Book r Codec Version Wed Jul 30 09 47 43 2008 Phone Setting b Network b SIP Settings r NAT Trans F Others F System Auth Save Change Update Reboot Completato Fiddien OFF auto hall Figure 66 VoIP ATA 4501 30 interface System Information and main menu REGISTRATION TO IPERVOICE SIP SERVER After these preliminary operations have been completed the registration procedure is the same for both devices Starting from the information page displayed after login set in the left column the network configuration with SIP Settings menu item Remember that to confirm and activate settings they must be saved clicking on the menu item Save Change and then on the Save button after this operation the telephone or the
73. versione 4 TCPAPv4 kt La connessione utiizza gi elementi seguen 4 E Condivisione file e stampanti per W 2 Protocolo intemet versione 6 TC a ee i Or te E possible ottenere l assegnazione automatica delle impostazoni IP se la essai alain hdl U2 rete supporta tale caratteristica In caso contrario sara necessario mw 1 Dever di 0 del maocia d indiy richiedere al amministratore di rete le impostazion IP corrette d t EST e Stien automaticamente un inchrizzo IP ueipatala s Dental SR irzo TF ara il 1 r Desesizio Utirza i seguente indirizzo IP TCP IP Protocolo predefinite per le W comunicazione tre diverse reti intercon Generale Configurazione altemativa Otten indrirro server DNS automaticamente Utizza i seguent indnzn server DNS Figure 64 VoIP ATA 4501 20 interface DHCP settings Connect the LAN port of VoIP ATA interface to the PC LAN port as shown in Figure 65 LINE PHONES PHONE Figure 65 VoIP ATA 450120 interface LAN connection Open the Internet browser and enter the address http 192 168 123 1 9999 as for 4501 5 telephone the display will show the same page of the web configurator login Figure 62 Enter the predefined 38 This DHCP configuration mode is referred to the procedure to be used with Microsoft Windows 7 with other operating systems the procedure could be different To change TCP IP configuration the user must have administrator rights 39
74. you confirm to change key code for this person Yes No Figure 157 Automatic Key Code Wizard Code change If the key is already assigned to another user before changing the assignment from the old to the new user the system will ask for a confirmation Figure 158 In both cases press Yes to confirm the operation and No to skip and go to the next person This key it s already assigned to folowing person Can you gt confirm replaced by the selected person Last Name Brown T First Hame John Apartment Apartmenti Figure 158 Automatic Key Code Wizard Changing code assignment Repeat the operation until the list of selected persons is completed This condition is shown by the button Skip which becomes dimmed However the user can reboot the Wizard to assign keys to other groups of people or correct the group previously selected 203 11 5 APARTMENT STATIONS CONFIGURATION The Pervoice system supports three types of apartment stations gt Door phones gt Video door phones gt Hands free video door phones Per VOICE If the initial configuration has been performed with the StartUp Wizard to each apartment station of the system is assigned the Video door phone category in this way the system can establish audio and video communications In order to assign the correct typology to devices access with the IPervoice FrontEnd to the section dedicated to apartment station con
75. 0 13 6 2 Adding new IP devices using their Mac Address nnnnnnnnnnnnannan111111nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnrrrrrrrnrrrrrnrnnn 262 13 6 3 Adding new column or apartment CEVICES cccccccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseseseeseeess 263 Deleting devices and other system COMPONENHS ccccesccsccssccseccsseeeseuceeueeeeeeuceuseeuseeeeauceeuseusegueeees 264 14 13 7 1 gt Deleting IP and COMM GEVICES crocerec2roc2r ened se ch medsmeresccenernaionincednccteaerdaedacalsoedues reini riiai enpeutat 264 13 7 2 Deleting O NErSYSIEMTCOMPONEINS vcr cc2ccc2n ccrener ein cenactseresoreneteceteczerontsordenedanedaneccmpdeemeeteretocesetongtoatenedeintenntes 265 1328 Template EXPO cotati hace tacoracaciates T a tuatnceansetat E cemaumunusationis 266 13 8 1 C mpiline theimmport Te 2232 Sete da sacange stoksSeasarl ae eia eaaa cedar ete dacedaat 267 TS DalailIMPOPre cannar N A 268 AAOS OS ar a Ta e S A a e a a a 269 TLO T Customized IOS SEaren a N 270 13 10 2 Search in the System Log in Multi Site MOdeC ccc cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseseseeeeeeeess 272 LERSE CM a a a a a eae tomeenceuaceeammnnesce 273 BALL SE ARGM DY ASU NIMO E aeaiee rode cecal co ieee eae ees 273 13 12 Search DY LOPOlOBICAl COUG nan ke nuiacacieteiatan accueil a A 274 13 11 SE arch DY NUTMEG ICC OG sereen E 274 13 114 Search by Fy pe and DEVICE NAME siscescstecccacedoreceveveenedevah
76. 02 15 REBOOT Reboot Remote server 10 1 13 1 Server ALIVE 3 1 0 19 3 1 0 19 2012 02 15 REBOOT Reboot Remote server 10 1 12 1 Server ALIVE 3 4 0 19 3 1 0 49 2012 02 15 REBOOT Reboot Figure 216 System maintenance Server upgrade in multi site mode sites servers restart N 55 Per VOICE 13 5 IPERVOICE DEVICES REPLACEMENT A device must sometimes be replaced because of a failure or when a new model is installed for example when a call module 1039 14 is replaced by 1039 13 If a replacement is needed remember that in IPervoice system there are two groups of devices gt IP devices gt Column devices The replacement procedure depends on the device to be changed that is a call module a gateway and another IP device or a 4 user decoder and a video door phone In the first case IP devices the replacement is performed exclusively with the FrontEnd in the second case a PDA Phone or a Netbook is mainly used the procedure is the same as in Column Devices Configuration described on page 157 In the second case the IPervoice server does not need to identify the column devices before their configuration The programming procedure if necessary is performed with the mobile device through the Bluetooth interface or only for apartment stations with the dip switches placed on the wall mounting bracket for the configuration procedure refer to the paragraph Apartment Stations Configuration D
77. 2 p m to 8 p m and a single time band on Saturday from 8 a m to 1 p m On Sunday holiday the door will not be opened To make data input easier use buttons Copy and Paste to copy and paste band values defined for each day Use the button Delete to delete all time bands defined in a day 213 Per VOICE W Multi Site after changes have been performed press the button Confirm to automatically apply them to all IPervoice servers configured in the Multi Site system If one or more sites are disconnected this state is shown by a red icon in the devices tree save operations will not be possible This because servers data would not be coherent inside the system If it is needed to operate also in such specific requirements the disconnected site must be suspended from its normal operation as described in paragraph Server Configuration in Multi Site Mode on page 240 HOLIDAYS LIST If holidays have been defined as described in paragraph Holidays on page 215 click on the arrow besides the title to open the list of holidays and select the ones to be assigned to the time profile For each holiday selected a new row will be added in the week programming area where to define operating time bands as previously described see the example of Figure 171 Sunday Add Copy I Paste Delete Christmas Pacts LF Add C Paste Delet 2 opy elete Figure 171 Advanced functions configuration Addi
78. 3 4 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 5 or higher communication After the Guaranteed conversation Time T2 is elapsed a priority 7 communication cannot be interrupted a priority 6 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 5 communication or higher a priority 5 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 5 communication or higher a priority 4 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 4 communication or higher a priority 3 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 3 communication or higher a priority 2 communication can only be interrupted by a priority 3 communication or higher a priority 1 communication can always be interrupted AUDIO CHANNEL MANAGEMENT ON THE RISER COLUMN CHOICE METHODS IPervoice allows a second audio channel to be wired on each riser column This optional function is useful in order to increase the number of simultaneous communications in the same riser column Figure 6 at page 26 in particular when a video door phone call and an apartment station call for the switchboard occur at the same time W Warning to make the second audio channel available a telephone cable twisted pair or a pair of a CAT5 cable must be installed in the riser column starting from the IP CATS riser column gateway to the first 4 user decoder from which the pair restarts to the next decoder and so on 47 Per VOICE In any case the use of the second audio channel if present or the
79. 8 2 5 ni Blocks un Lin MAC address 00 1E E0 00 10 98 cal Sey veadies FW version 2 64 1 0 amp y aia Special decoders Device status ALIVE Polling E 97 West Block Main corridor F J WB MC Lig hti1 man E WE MC Light Confirm Cancel a Switchboards SIP VoIP phones aD Video servers ap External person groups New device mabe Humber F Zones WB MC Light 0 WE MC Light2 1 Figure 97 Advanced Configuration Special Decoder OUTPUT LIST Each special decoder is provided with 2 independent relay outputs the first one with identification number O the second one with identification number 1 To configure the behaviour of each output access the configuration page shown in Figure 98 the following table describes configuration specific data Outputs can be activated by the system when one or more events occur as for example the opening of a passage on a call module a command sent by the concierge switchboard and so on The device is also provided with two inputs that can be activated by buttons or switches installed near the device the inputs can locally manage the respective outputs A typical example where a local command can be useful is the stair light management the opening of the entrance door by the electric lock of the call module generates the event which activates an output on the special decoder and turns the stair light on Also a button installed in the entrance hall and connect
80. 80 Configuration of concierge switchboards 1039 41 Management of VoIP telephones 4501 5 Management of video server devices 1039 69 Configuration of groups and external people maintenance men and suppliers authorized to access to the residential building Configuration of additional fields used in management of users belonging to the External person group Access to the search functions for new IP devices to be configured Definition of access zones with specific functions Anti pass back user count and so on 8 2 4 SYSTEM STRUCTURE The IPervoice Frontend allows the system information to be entered according to the system topologic structure The result is a hierarchical structure that contains the buildings Blocks the stairs inside each block Stairs and the respective Floors Figure 38 This figure shows the different devices that are associated to their position Knowing the system topological location of a device it is easy to identify a gateway a 4 user decoder or also the single apartments and the devices present inside them 91 Fla Blocks ne East Block Blak Main Block Left Stair p Right Stair H West Block B f Blocks c J nl East Block E n Main Block gir Left Stair SA e Secondary call module Secondary entry panel ENS Gateway Main Tower RA j Me ee es Decoder interface E AF Blocks Al East Block EHAE Main Block Bo cer stair So Secondary call module Secon
81. Advanced configuration Programming of 4501 VolP telephone speed dialling numbers 150 Per VOICE To save the new programmed user or update an existing one press the button Add Phone to delete information in the entered data field press the button Reset DOOR OPENING WITH VOIP TELEPHONE If the VoIP telephone 4501 5 is used as apartment station it must be able to open the passages pedestrian door and vehicle entrance gate for example managed by call modules The default telephone configuration is not suitable for this use so it must be changed using the telephone web interface Access to the web server as already described in the previous paragraph select from the left menu the item S P Settings and DTMF Settings the configuration page shown in Figure 101 In order to open the doors managed by the call modules using the telephone click on the option Send DTMF SIP Info and press the button Submit to confirm In the following page the user is reminded to save the configuration and reboot the device to make the changes active To do this click on the menu item Save change and on the save button the telephone will reboot with the new settings DTMF Setting You could set the DTMF setting in this page RFC 2833 Inband DTMF Send DTMF SIP Info Submit Reset Figure 101 Advanced configuration Settings for door opening with VoIP telephone Now the VoIP telephone is conf
82. B eii Swi Wis Concerge_15 10 7 100 100 BC AE CS 56 76 26 Delete SWI wid J SvWL_NW Conmerge_10 10 17 700 102 BAECS Se fers Delete as Extemal person groups Fle User custom fekis i eal Do SS Athletes Vilage N03 FWS0 o O o oo A 33 Athieties Village NO FWV3 0 D g Figure 89 Multi Site mode Advanced configuration Switchboard list Of course according to system dimension and operative requirements it is possible to configure more than one switchboard with different functions and competence areas 9 4 4 REGISTERED SERVERS In order that the Switchboards can operate in a Multi Site system they must be registered on IPervoice servers To do this access switchboard configuration page and select the desired sites in the area Registered servers as shown in Figure 91 on page 141 It is also important to perform with the suitable function on the switchboard the multi site configuration as described in the respective User manual The Switchboard must be registered at least on the servers that it will manage 140 Per VOICE 4 Warning in order to complete the registration the server must be active and online otherwise the FrontEnd will not allow the selection Figure 90 J Athletes Village N03 FW3 0 V Athletes Village N07 FW3 0 V Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 W Athletes Village N15 FW 3 0 Plot N W Plot NO W Plot No3 Plot NO4 WI Plot nog Plot N40 P
83. DRESS BOOK UPDATING Once the residents data has been entered the residents address book must be rebuilt This operation is performed by the Pervoice server to update the call modules directories To activate the function select the item UPDATE SYSTEM on the main menu the result is displayed in a pop up window as shown in Figure 145 Rebuild address books has succeeded Figure 145 Residents address book updating operation result W Warning this operation must be performed each time the residents address books are changed Otherwise the call modules and the respective switchboards will not show these updates The system will inform the user each time an operation is performed which requires an Address Book rebuild and when a system configuration update is needed highlighting the item UPDATE SYSTEM on the main menu as shown in Figure 146 SWITCH TO MOBILE MODE REBOOT LOGOUT Figure 146 System updating update request 193 Pe r VOICE 11 4 2 DOOR CODE CONFIGURATION To open a door from a main or secondary call module a Door code can be used A code unique in all the system can be assigned to each resident when this code is entered on the keypad of one or more call modules the relay used to open the door or the vehicle entrance gate is activated During configuration it is possible to select among the available devices those enabled for the opening with this code The section ind
84. E Seea Gateway Code Blockcode Addablock i j 9 Staircode Add a stair Stair will be added on current block am Figure 43 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new Gateway In the configuration page there are three sections highlighted in Figure 43 with the areas indicated by numbers 1 2 and 3 In the first one there are status and identification data in the second one the gateway data related to the system physical structure and in the third one there are the riser column devices connected to this gateway 98 Per VOICE Block code Stair code Floor code Apt code ja Ly al r4 ea E e Figure 44 Topological code structure The Block code and the Stair code assigned to the gateway specify its block and stair These codes are the first part of the system Topological code as shown in Figure 44 IDENTIFICATION DATA In this section the only data required to be entered by the installer is the name assigned to the gateway this name must be unique in the system The other information shown in Table 16 is some technical data Name Gateway identifier required field Max length 32 characters IP address IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the gateway MAC address Device unique physical address Used to identify each device during the configuration phase FW version Version of gateway application Firmware Device status Device s
85. I cl CRM em Nm a a 20M RET natn Te ge RCo eR I NEE ISET 0 WRN Pt ee mean are ee ee eo eT 90 Co SO SUG Tie SU UCN Le coe tas ans a ba het chetastiechn a cactaclatetid tates ate E 91 B25 PFET MARY GUC CHINN cts tase tests cee ce ha cea se dag cist ane tase ce eee ae ated tect hs Sselsciscle adele tense eee cemaseaaaeaeeciahe 92 SS Mhe Stare 0 Wizard aonana a a A a 93 SoA SECO O a a a A e e 96 333 IPZCATS Gateway Conniguratio M deea a A Dead dee Gea atiaa teeta ia dala 98 8 3 4 IP Call Module Configuration ccccccessessesssssssssssssssssssssssscssssseaeaaaaaaaaesssseeesssssssssssssesssssssssasssaaaaaaaaaas 105 8 3 5 IP Video Door Unit configuration Entry Panel ccccccccccssecesssceceesseeeeseeecesscecesssseceseaeeceeesssecessseeeeees 107 8 3 6 Concierge Switchboard COnMSUTAIION siti ae 109 B3 7 Video SENET COMMSUTAUION enau eis eee ee ee 111 S38 AP Key Reader C OMMBUTATIO isese eer re ae 112 83 9 Special Decoder Config rati M siss aces ade aleadce a e i EO 113 8 3 10 VolP Telephone CON BUrat Oise asesccsccsecescecececstececsesscedesesdeadedasdaddannsecocceceteacaeecteanteac bet egedeeedeewndeddasdagcccuccecestee 114 8 3 11 End of Configuration with StartUp Wizard c cc eeeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeesesssseesseeeeaeaeasasaaseeeseeeeeessesssssssasssssasaaaas 122 9 Pervoice Devices advanced CONFIZuratiOn cccccccsccsccsccccccccccsccsccccecccccccccccscescccceccesceccecceccees 123 g IPCA
86. IGURATION Select the menu item SOFTWARE USER to access the section dedicated to rights and users management of IPervoice FrontEnd f Modify password HELP Quit software user configuration A Software Users Configuration bf Software users list ch i pdt la a a as cha Software Users List _ _ Add software user mmmn E TB Software User Rights List User name Rights administrator Sie Admmnistratar Delete installer instaler Delete remote instaler Delete sysadmin System Admnistrator Figure 196 Advanced functions configuration List of users Figure 196 shows the list of users automatically created by the system IPervoice manages also five different profiles called User Rights used to define which actions can be performed on the system as described later Figure 197 j F A Software Users Configuration oy Software user rights list cii Software Users Liat l E A sottware User Rights List fea Ingtaier User rights name i Sie Admirator installer an Maintenance Ste Adminstrator fia Site Manager Mantenance El fe System Admingtraior Sie Manager System Admunairater Figure 197 Advanced functions configuration List of User Rights 241 12 8 1 PREDEFINED USERS Each time a new Pervoice system is installed four users and five profiles with different rights used to operate inside the FrontEnd are automatically created They are listed in the following table startin
87. IP 4501 5 TELEPHONE REGISTRATION To perform this operation access 4501 5 telephone web server First of all the IP address assigned to the VoIP telephone by the Pervoice server must be known To obtain this data the VoIP telephone must be correctly powered and the LCD display must show the message No Service press the button Menu and then the buttons 4 and 5 on the telephone keypad Read the IP address shown in the first display row beside the letter W for example 192 168 2 8 use this address to access to the web server by entering it in the browser address bar followed by the server listening port 9999 for example http 192 168 2 8 9999 the installer will see the login page of the VoIP telephone web configurator Figure 62 For access enter default username and password and click the button Login the browser will show the system information page Figure 63 W Warning the IP address is dynamic and is assigned by the IPervoice server to the VoIP telephone this address can change if the server is switched off or the server software is updated So it is important to complete the registration procedure without switching off the server It is suggested to note the MAC Address printed on the identification label under the telephone base because it could be useful later also using the FrontEnd to uniquely identify a device 3 Both VolPhone 4501 5 and VoIP ATA 4501 30 interface are managed as VoIP telephon
88. NANCE SRV CONFIGURATION LOG SEARCH SOFTWARE USER i Er VOICE It forces the update of contents displayed in the page It shows the submenu of the following configuration functions e Startup wizard e Automatic Key Code wizard W Warning starts the guided configuration of IPervoice system starts the guided configuration of proximity keys in Multi Site mode Startup Wizard is not available It recalls the system Automatic and Manual diagnostic functions It shows the submenu of the functions dedicated to the system maintenance i e Device change Backup and restore Write to Mobile Import Data Export template access to replacement functions for damaged devices backup and restore of system configuration data also available in FW UPGRADE menu download of column devices configuration data to Netbook or PDA Phone activation of data import function resident and external export of data template for resident and external Change of IPervoice server date and time and configuration of system remote management It displays the system log It activates the search functions available in the Pervoice system for example search of a resident of a device by topological or logic code by key code and so on Access to user management functions 88 i er VOICE FW UPGRADE It shows the submenu of the functions dedicated to the update of the system application software firmware e
89. OGI EWAN sess sic seiss N A E E A 123 O27 APEaLMod l E nnana a A a a 124 SATI BOCK GTOUPeasn Pe RR en RSE a a ed ee eee ae le 125 9 2 2 Remarks about Secondary Call Modules eee ceeecceeeesseeeeseeessessessseeeeeeseeaeaaesaseeeeeessssessssssseassessaaeaas 126 2 es Menace Opo 1 er tT re re ee eee 127 O24 SPECIAlFUNCHOMS en ete iste aun eee ie ee 128 oS JE Ace DOO GRP ep se ED Serpe as CE NES ee eee ee er rr ee eee 129 S93 IP Video Door Unt ENTY Panel sini ie eaters el vee areas ae 133 OF APO TA AC Co OU ONS sno aa aes Ae ac was nase th ec ema ete ca cca Le 134 2 ee 6 mms Gr 11d 8111 6 0 0 er er a AP AN ee eee ee EA eR ee eee 135 D SPec FUNCIONS een enn nen See ene BS a AneS AO Se ORS Soe ae Sane OBE REE REDE Mites aan nen Sen oS aNE aE Sheer oe eReE NT aE RD 136 9 3 4 DOOS orci secet store esti oes a hes sas es eae els eaten teh esc A econ 137 OA Concierge SWITCH DO AIO essor sete vadeannsdicecgcacdcbesesuintocd Sale tete anauantaausIogeIetiauiatudetaauds and eenesie nate asmansuenss 138 Os COMPETENCE ANC Tegesna a aanaeas staat onan saan no eat E nanan bo uceneoen at meaaaer ences 138 OAD SPEClAl PUNCUONS eea see ieee estate eek ee cg ee 139 DAS Switchboard in Multi Site Mod 35 ccccxeoetrecacesatercrtsecath one E cance E 140 DAA Repbistered SEVES a a e 140 94 5 Competence Area e Special Functions in Multi Site Mode ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 142 S VdEO SEINE
90. OdB 4dB 3dB 5dB Audio Messages Audio message volume OFF Available values OFF 5dB 3dB OdB 4dB 3dB 5dB Camera Leds active Enabling of camera led illuminator Yes Available values Yes No Table 32 Advanced Configuration Entry Panel Meaning of Interface Options parameters 134 Per VOICE 9 3 2 CALL BUTTONS Each module 1039 72 is provided with 2 call buttons that can be up to 32 max by installing modules 1038 17 In order to associate the desired function to each button select from the pull down menu in the section header the button to be configured and expand the section Call buttons Figure 83 _ amp Call buttons Call button Sere ee Not assigned Switchboard VoIP Phone Apartment Topological code 01 01 01 fa 01 fa Special functions Confirm Reboot Cancel Figure 83 Advanced Configuration Call Button setting on the IP video door unit Table 33 describes call button configuration programming Call Buttons The system executes the command configured when the call button selected from the pull down menu is pressed Available values are from Call button 1 up to Call button 34 max Not assigned Default condition when the button is pressed the system doesn t send any command Switchboard This command is used to call a switchboard or activate special decoder outputs For switchboards there are three different options gt Specific Switchb
91. P Settings IP address 10 1 2 1 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default router EF E DNS server Set DHCP Mode Free Blocked Range 10 1 2 20 to 10 1 2254 65534 aviable address Set Multi site confiquration ae Goto multi site configuration Figure 193 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration iPervoice server parameters setting Multi site configuration Only users with System Administrator rights can access the Multi Site configuration 238 Per VOICE Press the button Goto multi site configuration to access the summary page which allows to configure a Multi Site system Figure 194 shows a system already activated the list contains all the sites present in the configuration and their status The following table describes information meaning and possible operations Multi Site name NUE Village Site name C Address IP Athletes Village N03 FW3 0 10 1 33 1 Delete Suspend Update J Athletes Village NO7 FW3 0 10 1 7 1 Delete Suspend Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 10 1 40 1 vi Delete Suspend Athletes Village N15 FW 3 0 10 1 45 1 4 Delete Suspend Delete Suspend _ Delete Ih suspend _ Suspend Delete Suspend Update Delete Suspend Delete 10 7 10 1 c 10 1 13 1 W Delete ji Suspend 10 1 14 1 E Delete Suspend 10 1 15 1 Delete ie S
92. PlotN26N PiolN26S 2011 12 28 09 19 18 Device status Call Module CM Plot N10 Alive 2011 12 28 09 18 18 Device status Gateway GW Plot N10 Alive 2011 12 28 09 17 18 Device status Key reader KR Plot N10 Alive 2011 12 28 09 16 18 Device status Switchboard SWI_N07 Alive 2011 12 28 09 15 18 Device status Switchboard SWI_N15 Alive 2011 12 28 09 14 18 Device status Switchboard SWI_N10 Alive 2011 12 28 09 08 18 Device status Call Module CM Plot N10 Alive 2011 12 28 0907 18 Device status Gateway GW Plot N10 Alive 2011 12 28 09 06 18 Device status Key reader KR Plot N10 Alive Figure 236 Multi Site mode Utility functions System Log management As shown in the figure in the upper side of the page a tabbed menu allows to move from a site to another one the site selected is in bold type in the example the Plot N10 Filter methods described in paragraph 13 10 1 Customized log search on page 270 are the same the FrontEnd will automatically query all the system sites 272 Per VOICE 13 11 SEARCH In the FrontEnd main menu select the item Search to access the search page as shown in Figure 237 a Search Search by Person lastname Search Figure 237 Utility functions Search This function allows to search system users and devices in different modes These can be selected from the pull down menu called Search by The available search modes are shown below with the result of the search perfo
93. STAND BY The switchboard attendant can activate as needed the concierge service by selecting one of the above mentioned modes the switchboard competence area will be managed according to the area configurations In DAY mode all the calls addressed to apartment stations coming from main and secondary call stations VoIP telephones or other apartment stations are routed to the switchboard which has competence on that apartment station area In this way each call is not sent to the user but it is 54 Per VOICE intercepted by the switchboard The attendant can speak with the visitor and transfer the communication to the user or act as an intermediary speaking with the user and the visitor In NIGHT mode the switchboard does not perform the concierge service for main call stations that will directly send the call to the desired apartment station Calls coming from apartment stations are normally forwarded Alternatively the attendant after selecting NIGHT mode can transfer its competence area to another switchboard present in the system By selecting DAY mode the transferred competence area will be automatically restored on the first switchboard In STANDBY mode the concierge service is disabled and calls directed to apartment stations are not intercepted Calls coming from apartment stations are not forwarded to the switchboard an alert tone on the apartment station notifies the user that the call has not been sent Neverthele
94. SUSERRIGHT_RIGHT_15 Read and White T Confirm Cancel Figure 198 Advanced functions configuration Changing Site Administrator rights a Except System Administrator which cannot be changed 242 Per VOICE User rights name Name of the role Required field Max length 32 characters User rights configuration List of rights which can be configured in IPervoice system For each one there is a pull down menu used to select the allowed operation Available values e No rights no possible actions for this function e Read only the function can be read but not changed by the user e Read and Write the user can configure the function 12 8 3 SOFTWARE USER Differently from the previously described user rights it is possible to add new users and change or delete existing users To add a new user press the button Add software user under the page title Figure 196 To change a user click on the name of the user In both cases a change page will appear as shown in Figure 199 ka A New software user Usemame manager User description Site manager user Password Confirm password Call module password seseseeee Confirm cm password eoeoeeeee User rights type Site Manager Confirm Cancel Figure 199 Advanced functions configuration Adding a new user The following table shows the field meaning and data limits Username Username used to access the system Max length 16 characters Required alph
95. Settings Help DS G ao Figure 19 Panic Service Alarm displaying on the Concierge Switchboard The operations performed by the switchboard attendant to reset the panic alarm indication depend on the mode selected during the system configuration Site Configuration on page 96 These operations can be gt Unconditional reset gt Conditional reset gt Conditional reset with timeout In the first case to reset the indication the attendant must only press the button reset in the alarm window as shown in Figure 19 in the second case he must first pressing pre reset button and then complete the procedure by pressing the reset button present on the decoder of the apartment from which the alarm comes keep the reset button pressed for at least 5 seconds Therefore the attendant 56 Per VOICE can perform the reset operation only after going to the alarmed apartment In the last case all the procedure must be completed within the time specified in configuration If this time is not respected the alarm will be activated again and the attendant must repeat all the reset procedure W Note All URMET door phone or video door phone apartment stations are provided with an input dedicated to panic alarm management A simple button or a remote control 1033 212 can be connected to this input The remote control is composed by a radio transmitter with a button and a receiver with an output contact to be connec
96. TY FUNCTIONS The operations to be performed for IPervoice system maintenance mainly concern the following points gt Saving and restoring system operating data Checking firmware version of server and IP devices Upgrade of IPervoice firmware resident on the server Adding replacing and deleting system devices Exporting Resident and External Person template Y Vv V V WV Importing and exporting residents and externals data In utility section there is gt System Log gt Searching names and devices All these operations are performed using the IPervoice FrontEnd so in the following explanations is assumed that the PC is connected to IPervoice IP network and the user has gained access to the FrontEnd with the internet browser For details refer to the chapter The Frontend on page 85 13 1 BACKUP OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DATA Backup is used to save a copy of system data on the user PC To access to this function select the item MAINTENANCE from FrontEnd main menu and then choose Backup and Restore Select Backup all data at the centre of the page and press the button Next to start the data saving procedure Figure 200 Backup and Restore functions are present also in the menu item FW UPGRADE 245 Per VOICE Bil Configuration backup and restore It provides to the installer the ability to extract all the system configuration information and to download them as a single file
97. The devices 1039 36 of apartments where the parameter Decoder Port Number has been changed Decoder Port Number 1039 36 Devices configuration Apartment identifier page 184 Lift Interface Code 1039 37 Devices configuration The devices 1039 37 of apartments where the Lift interface identifier page 177 parameter Code has been changed Second audio channel 1039 50 Devices configuration All devices 1039 34 present on the involved riser present page 123 column Table 40 Column devices programming table of parameters devices programming dependencies 174 Per VOICE 10 2 4 USER DECODERS CONFIGURATION 4 user decoders are associated to a Block and a Stair and are physically and logically connected to an IP gateway To select the device to be configured its respective IP gateway must be identified then expand the item Decoders that includes the devices 1039 34 Figure 127 4 Technical Guide System we Time Promies i ES primary call module Primary entry panel E nm Blocks Name Number AR East Block Decodert 1 Delete ni Main Block Decodere 2 Delete n l West Block Decoders 3 Delete a Sb Decoder4 4 Delete West Stair Secondary call module a a secondary external module B Gateway EastTower E Pudecoder interface Oy Decoder D Decoder2 E Ds Decoder3 ed E my Decoder4 Figure 127 4 user Decoders configuration Devices list Click on the desired decoder name t
98. Update Package 251 Per VOICE Introduction Upload firmware file Upgrade End Select the Firmware Upgrade Package FUP for upload es T Figure 211 System maintenance Server upgrade FUP selection If the file is valid the system will be ready for upgrade only after asking the user for a final confirmation till this moment the procedure can be interrupted without changing the system status After confirming by pressing the button Yes continue the operation cannot be interrupted Introduction Upload firmware file Upgrade End The firmware will be upgraded with version 3 1 0 19 It s hardly recommended that you backup your system Have you backed up your system Figure 212 System maintenance Server upgrade upgrade confirmation The firmware upgrade phase may last for some minutes Do not disconnect the PC from the FrontEnd or switch the server off during this phase wait until the system asks to reboot the server Figure 213 to make the upgrade active 252 W Warning Per VOICE Upgrade firmware Steps Introduction Upload firmware file Upgrade system KY To complete the installation of the update you must restart the Figure 213 System maintenance Server upgrade system reboot once the server reboot is completed the FrontEnd page is reloaded to inform the user that the operation has been completed In some cases the automatic reload is not perfo
99. Urmel a IPERVOICE SYSTEM oT INSTALLATION MANUAL Koi 29 Sa Q ad 3 se y p Py i p Ty N fe ip ko og nN D Py Y a URMET IS IN YOUR LIFE SUMMARY MT124 025A Version 3 20 L IP rvoice IPIO Lac Saecet ace ce centre sores octen EEE E enn eemavesers 8 2 Digital audio video transmission cscecccsccsssssssscccccccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscssscssssscscseseceeecs 9 3 General Cal ACle St CS secossa E T e 11 A Sytem AEC CEI O nnar EE E EE 13 Al TheExternalLevelihelP MICE WOE sainn E E EEN OSEE 14 ALt TheIP dEV een E EEE EE eee aarin 15 42 Whe lnternal Level the IP riser COMMNS scssesaqcceciccccaaowscinecescicuelescicasiaieisincessanadedeaadeaudousiancavadeewisiateniecs 24 4 3 The internal level the dedicated CATS5 riser COLUMNS cccccccccssscccseeeecaeeeeeseeeeeseeeceseeeeeseeeeeaneeeeaeaeeeas 26 4 4 The Internal Level The IP apartMents ccccccsscssccssccseccuseeeeeeeeesseseseuseuseeeeeueeueeeuseeeseueeeuseeeauseeusanss 30 4 5 The Internal Level the distribution in traditional apartments cccceccssccescceceseceseeeeceseeeuseeesauseeuseess 33 4e Mukti Site ARC Me UN essea iin eiee a EE seers a a aaea 38 4 6 1 Switchboard Installation cee cccccceeceeeeseesssssnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesaseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeeees 39 4 6 2 IP Addressing inside a Multi Site SYSteiM nnn cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee
100. Write To BT lower side of the figure The device must be powered in order to perform the programming procedure The installer must select the right device to be programmed and connect the Bluetooth programming interface to it The system is not able to identify a wrong selection so the parameters will be downloaded to the device in any case 166 e 4 0 43 ok Stair Devices ee 42 0 44 ok Site Technical Guide System Site Technical Guide System Block West Block B2 Block West Block B2 Stair West Stair S1 Stair West Stair S1 FL Common Devices 1 1 READ FROM BT 2 WRITE TO BT Code 001 w Block List Stair Device Stair Device Site Technical Guide System Site Technical Guide System bad BACK Block West Block Block West Block BaFast Block Stair West Stair Stair West Stair fa Main Block Back Back dh West Block T MEDecoderd faCommon Devices Decoder2 ri j 2 Decoder3 i Decoder4 Gateway EastTower 1 2 Figure 118 SoftMobile Windows Mobile and Symbian versions System data download to the 4 user decoder The next page is shown in Figure 119 on the left here press the button Search Device for the first time if the Bluetooth device has not been identified yet the PDA automatically shows the identification procedure Pairing with Bluetooth programming interface Windows Mobile on page 169 e Pairing with Bluetooth programming interface Symb
101. a page similar to Figure 259 which contains the previously added devices or an empty list if no additions have been performed yet 1 The MAC address which identifies uniquely an IP device is written on the back side of all IPervoice devices 288 Per VOICE de Technical Gude System a Time Profile Access t O Loos Profies it Ca Door Proties H Primary cal module Primary entry panel it Fln Biocks i iun P Lt E EN Key readers 4 OD Speca decoders t a Swichboards tj tr Vof phones _ Sere amp Video servers t x External person proupa gt iw device Figure 259 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Adding new IP devices By clicking on Add new devices the user will be asked to select in the dialog window shown in Figure 260 the device type and to enter the MAC address When the system goes back to Server mode this MAC address will allow the system to find the new module and configure it as specified In the example a new VoIP telephone 4501 5 is added Device Type Voip phone Mac address 00 1E E0 00 08 2F Confirm Cancel Figure 260 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Identification data of the new IP device Press the button Confirm to go back to the previous list where the VoIP telephone has been added Click on the button Configure to access the configuration page where to enter information needed to operate as shown Figure 261 289 Per VOICE
102. age 115 the item Phone Book Speed Dial Settings to activate the function the page shown in Figure 100 will be displayed To obtain the IP address of each VoIP telephone select the device with the FrontEnd and read the IP address in its configuration page Do not note the IP address because it could change become invalid or be assigned to another device 149 Per VOICE Speed Dial Phone List You could set the speed dial phones in this page Phono Namo NumberoruRL T Select 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T E 9 Concierge B2S1F1C1 Delete Selected Delete All Reset Add New Phone Position 0 9 Name Number or URL Add Phone Reset Figure 100 configuration 4501 5 VoIP telephone numbers programming 10 speed dialling numbers are available from 0 to 9 by selecting the respective code the user can call the programmed number Besides the fields required to program a new number described in the following Table 35 there are some buttons that make it possible to gt Delete the selected number Delete Selected gt Delete all the stored numbers Delete All gt Undo the selection Reset Position Position to be programmed Required field min 0 max 9 Name Mnemonic name for the position to be programmed Optional alohanumeric field Maximum length 31 characters Number or URL Topological code of the device to be called Required field For example B2S1F1C1 Table 35
103. ailable on the PC connected to the FrontEnd In order to access to containing the upgrade the section dedicated to server upgrade select the item FW UPGRADE from the FrontEnd main menu and then the item Upgrade System Firmware Before starting the user is reminded to perform a backup in order to avoid data losses Figure 210 and it is recommended to perform a restart of the server via the FrontEnd selecting the REBOOT on the main menu By pressing the button Backup system the installer is redirected to data saving procedure previously described in the paragraph Backup of system configuration on page 245 2 Upgrade firmware Sheps Introduction Upload firmware file Upgrade End AN WARNING Possible loss of data It s strongly recommended to do a backup and to REBOOT the system before firmware upgrade Back to main page i Next Figure 210 System maintenance Server upgrade procedure start If the backup has already been performed press the button Next to go the next phase Select the file Figure 211 containing the update package FUP that must have been downloaded to the PC connected to the FrontEnd as already described Select this file as usual in the dialog window that is opened by pressing the button Browse 102 Pervoice firmware updates are available on URMET internet site www urmet com or directly on the site www ipervoice com t03 FUP Firmware
104. air the residents of a specific stair can be associated to a call module In the IPervoice system contrary to the usual procedure the resident names are associated to the apartments and so the residents address books are block and stair lists For further details concerning the resident names apartments association see the paragraph Resident Management on page 134 125 Per VOICE 9 2 2 REMARKS ABOUT SECONDARY CALL MODULES The Secondary call modules are automatically configured by the system in order to show only the names of residents associated to the competence Block or Stair If the visitor knows the code logic topological he can call any system apartment in any Block Stair For this reason a resident of Stair A called by the Secondary Call Module of Stair B can also open the door of Stair B In some systems this feature is not accepted and so it is possible to disable this function with a suitable setting on the secondary call module configuration page By selecting the item Call restricted to stair as shown in Figure 75 calls are restricted only to competence stair SIP Address 00_1E_E0_FF_FF_37 IP Address 192 168 2 2 Figure 75 Advanced Configuration Secondary Call Module call restriction 126 Per VOICE 9 2 3 INTERFACE OPTIONS This section is dedicated to the configuration parameters setting of the IP call modules user interface The Figure 76 shows on the Frontend t
105. air item the display will show its gateways 4 user decoders and lift interfaces On Symbian devices to select the search mode by Topological code or by Type and device name press the button Selection in models with joystick this is the central button of the device 172 i er VOICE Bo Zw Ye six 14 17 ok Search by San COCO Obi Name Topologic code East Block LeftStair B151 ast Block 1 i East Block Main Block BO Main Block West Block LeftStair BOSI Common Devices cD RightStai B0S2 SoftMobile Left Stair l Left Stair West Block B2 Right Stair Bos West Stair B251 Switchboards amp VoIP CDSV Mest Crap _BRGIE Figura 126 SoftMobile versioni Windows Mobile e Symbian Risultati ricerca per Codice Topologico 10 1 4 PARAMETERS FOR COLUMN DEVICES CONFIGURATION IPervoice configuration data required for correct operation of the system is of a different type It is programmed in the IPervoice server by means of the FrontEnd as already described W Warning column devices must be programmed only AFTER all configuration data has been stored in the FrontEnd database Otherwise if some system data are changed in the FrontEnd database many column devices may need to be reprogrammed in order to operate correctly The following table shows what devices need to be reprogrammed according to changed parameters If one or more parameters in the table are changed the column devices
106. al memory it must not be the same used to install the application software for column devices programming PDA based on Windows Mobile do not have these limitations However it is suggested to use the same procedure for both the device types always save the config dat file on the memory card for example in a folder named Pervoice gt The configuration file is called config dat This name cannot be changed in order to be identified and loaded correctly by the PDA software 161 Per VOICe al es ee Aj PE j JAA Reis ss File Modifica Visualizza Strumenti Bij Organizze Be Visualizza Y Ci Collegamenti preferiti Nome Tipo Dimensioni I IE Documenti IE Immagini i Musica config dat Altro Cartelle Sb Super di System Volume Information s d telerik i l i Temp Ly TestProjects A Nero Scout E PDA Phone _ ca e cheda di memoria a IPervoice 1 elemento Figure 112 System data download to PDA Destination folder Once the copy is completed the USB connection between PC and PDA is not needed any more The PDA can be disconnected and used to download system data to column devices 10 1 3 DOWNLOAD OF SYSTEM DATA TO COLUMN DEVICES To download system data the SoftMobile application installed on PDA is used First of all launch the application if it starts for the first time the screen displayed is shown in Figure 113 In some versions the applicatio
107. al module Secondary entry panei 2 a Gateway Vest Tower E3 my Decoders Eid vin iarface Bld vn gs Relay ie Paih L a 3 J H lad Main Entrance Cal Mod S te Garage Access Reade Figure 131 Lift Interface Configuration Path list In both cases the display shows the configuration page as shown in Figure 132 ts Main Entrance Call Module Type of linked device Name of linked device Callmodule iy Main Entrance Call Module Relay activation time 15 sec 2 5min Custom sec infinite Confirm Cancel Figure 132 Lift Interface Configuration Creation of access path The data available for the configuration are summarized in the following table Type of linked device List of device types to which the path must be linked Allowed values Call module Entry panel key reader Switchboard Name of linked device List of system devices of the selected type The selection of a device is required 178 Relay activation time Activation time of relays associated to the path in seconds The following options are available 15 sec 5 min Custom Infinite In the third case it is necessary to specify the relay excitation time in seconds ASSOCIATING COMMAND RELAYS To complete the lift interface configuration command relays must be associated to floors For each floor to be enabled it is necessary to associate the switching of one or more relays which enable the lift to go 76 up I
108. al wiring topology amp distances Switch 4 4 PoE Ports Switch 4 4 PoE Ports 1039 44 1039 44 ae switch to switch max 100 m pote eee ee eee ee ee ees PR aaa s mi pa ARF rna Max 100 m ra aaia soaks ail al er Sta n dz ard Ether err net tevi C ces a a E eee eee 2 ee Figure2 23 External level IP network Laot and distances In the Figure 23 different kinds of branch are shown gt PoE devices branch as the Call module 1039 14 or the IP Gateway 1039 50 gt Standard Ethernet devices branch as the Concierge switchboard 1039 41 or the IPervoice Server 1039 1 64 Per VOICE gt Switch to switch branch used to connect PoE switches in order to extend the Ethernet network In all cases the max allowed distance is that defined by IEEE 802 3 standards for Fast Ethernet networks 100 Mb s connected with UTP CATS cable according to these standards the distance between two Ethernet devices must not be longer than 100 mt External wiring topology amp distances wwe i i i l i i Block 1 i Block 2 Block 3 i i l i i i i i i i i om i Jom a i i m i i J om i i E EE I i J i i i fma l i A m i i Am l i mun I i im l i i i m aa l i i m i fm i fom oe i i im i i 28 I i fom im l i im ne l i im l i i i iman l i L im l i i R l i i L i i i i imo l i m i i i i fom aad i i im l i m l i i z i i Ay i i Am I i L l
109. allowed also in pipes containing 230 V conductors Electric and physical characteristics External sheath diameter and colour 5 7 0 25mm RAL 5017 Solid copper wires Red copper wire diameter 0 51mm 24AWG Min radius of curvature 45 mm Table 11 Technical prescriptions Cable 1039 91 technical characteristics 7 2 1 WIRING INSTRUCTIONS The instructions to correctly use the blue CAT5 1069 91 cable are similar to those already described for IP black cable also in this case it is suggested to follow them carefully in order to ensure the correct operation of column devices gt Crimp the black cable 1039 91 only on RJ45 connectors with NOLAN logo 1039 101 gt Insert the conductor into the wire guide respecting indicated colours EIA TIA 568B Standard Cabl Cabl nati Cable Colour eat Cable Colour No No 2 ome 6 oem Ca ome 8 wom gt Cut the cables in order they stick out about 5mm from the wire guide insert the guide into the plug and crimp the plug using the suitable tool gt Verify that the blue sheath is inside the plug 715 i er VOICE 7 3 WARNING ABOUT RJ45 CONNECTORS USE CAT5 Ethernet cables have 8 conductors inside that can be gt stranded wire also named flexible conductors gt solid plain copper wire Cables with stranded conductors flexible are those normally used for mobile cables that allow a personal computer to be connected to a wall socket These cab
110. ameras the right one contains the selected cameras Absence Presence button When the user changes the resident absence presence status by pressing the dedicated button in the apartment the system executes the command on the configured outputs W Warning the absence presence button is only available on the Master apartment station i e on the apartment station with identification number 0 Alarm signal The system executes the command in case of alarm event coming from the apartment issued from the panic alarm button of apartment stations or alarm interface 1039 61 Table 46 Command setting for special decoders meaning of configuration parameters 38 For further information about door phone buttons please refer to the paragraph Button Function Assignment on page 62 190 Per VOICE 11 4 RESIDENT MANAGEMENT As already described the Pervoice system manages the residents data by associating them to the apartments So the system creates residents address books linked to their respective blocks and stairs instead of a single general directory To add a new resident select in the devices tree the item Resident related to the apartment where the name is to be saved Figure 142 W Note Two options are available to select an apartment in the devices tree select the IP gateway and then the 4 user decoder to which the apartment is connected as shown in the example or select the apartment fro
111. and Event to the Special Decoder 47 The Special code must be numeric its length must not exceed 8 digits To activate the special code entering mode on the Call Module press at the same time the button X and the button 0 148 Per VOICE 9 8 VoIP TELEPHONE The VoIP telephone 4501 5 has no other parameters to be configured besides those described in the respective section of the StartUp Wizard No alphanumeric codes can be entered from the telephone keypad if the logic or topological codes defined in the system contain non numeric characters to call a switchboard another VoIP telephone or the apartments these codes must be entered in the telephone directory In this way to perform a call the telephone directory or the speed dialling can be used The programming procedure is performed by accessing the web server of each unit 4501 5 or VoIP ATA 4501 30 see Preliminary Operations for VoIP 4501 5 telephone registration on page 114 for login procedure and must then be repeated for each system device Two memory banks are available that can be programmed for the following purposes gt The directory Phone Book gt The speed dialling numbers Speed Dial Settings The programming modes are the same in both cases so only those concerning the speed dialling numbers will be described After accessing the VoIP telephone web server select from the menu on the left side of the page as shown in Figure 63 at p
112. and in which a passage can be opened For every profile more time bands can be defined for example morning afternoon and evening Each profile is week based so different operating modes can be defined for every day These profiles can be associated to one or more doors of the building Access Profile With the same methods used for passages it is possible to define profiles associated to door lock release codes proximity keys or both of them Holiday Profile These profiles which are used in the previous profiles allow defining of specific dates in which the standard time profile can be changed 5 7 3 ANTI PASS BACK With this feature one or more zones in the system can be created where entry and exit passages will be defined so if a user comes into the building using a passage defined as entry in an anti pass back zone he will not be able to get through that door again before he has left the zone through an exit door With this feature it is not possible to come into a zone using a key if the user has not left that zone using the same key 5 8 THE TELEPHONY SERVICE VOIP In the IPervoice system one or more VoIP telephones must be installed as for example the model 4501 5 These telephones installed on the IP network can be called with their logic or topologic code from the call modules the apartment stations and the concierge switchboards present on the system by associating one of the auxiliary bu
113. anumeric code User description Description of the user Optional field Max length 64 characters Password Password and password confirmation Required masked fields To be valid Confirm Password they must be identical Max length 16 characters The user sysadmin cannot be deleted from the system 243 Per VOICE Call module password Password and password confirmation used to perform some configuring Confirm Call module operations from call modules Required numeric masked fields To be valid password they must be identical Max length 8 characters This data can be accessed and changed only if the user is provided with Installer or System Administrator rights Otherwise the field will be dimmed User rights type The value can be selected from a pull down menu Allowed values are indicated in paragraph Predefined Users on page 242 12 8 4 CHANGING THE PASSWORD To access the password change page press the button Modify password in the upper side of the user configuration main page This page is the same used to change the password but with some restrictions according to user rights Select the function enter the new password according to rules described in paragraph Software User and save the new configuration 38 The users with System Administrator rights can change the password of all system users The other users can only change their own password 244 Per VOICE 13 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND UTILI
114. apartment stations see the paragraph Button Function Assignment on page 76 154 Per VOICE VoIP Phone The call is sent to the VoIP telephone selected from the pull down menu Apartment In this case the call is sent to an apartment The selection is made by indicating the topologic code of the apartment which must belong to the same IP Gateway Table 3 7 Stair Advanced Configuration call buttons Configuration parameters meaning 9 9 3 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS The last section is dedicated to commands which an apartment can execute to one or more system outputs Figure 105 shows the options available Special buttons Button Hotassigned Outputs B Output List rive output on r Openin Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Drive output on Gate Openin Not assigned Outputs Output List Self insertion button Hot assigned Outputs Output List TVCC cameras Main Entrance Pedestnan Door Main Entrance Call Modul Se me ae ae gt Absence Presence button Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Alarm signal Not assigned Outputs gt Output List Confirm Cancel Figure 105 Stair Advanced Configuration Setting of special preset commands Command types for outputs of 1039 80 special decoder are similar to the previously described ones for ex page 128 or 139 but there are other commands specific for apartments The following table shows the list
115. assignment of each device that must be unique connected to a network 39 Per VOICE Configuration on page 236 which allows to assign addresses only to a pre defined list of devices By defining a specific address range for each site an easier management is allowed for example if 4 Sites must be installed in the Multi Site system and there are 3 switchboards a good solution could be the following gt Server IP 10 1 1 1 gt Server IP 10 1 2 1 gt Net Mask 255 255 0 0 gt Net Mask 255 255 0 0 gt DCHP Range 10 1 1 2 10 1 1 254 gt DCHP Range 10 1 2 2 10 1 2 254 gt Server IP 10 1 3 1 gt Server IP 10 1 4 1 gt Net Mask 255 255 0 0 gt Net Mask 255 255 0 0 gt DCHP Range 10 1 3 2 10 1 3 254 gt DCHP Range 10 1 4 2 10 1 4 254 Switchboard 1 Switchboard 2 Switchboard 3 Static IP 10 1 100 101 Static IP 10 1 100 102 Static IP 10 1 100 103 As shown above servers dynamically assign the addresses to the devices in their subnet the Switchboards which have an address statically assigned by the installer can be identified because they are in a different subnet Other solutions can be implemented according to network devices configuration and system structure constraints W Warning IP devices connected to the server where IP or DHCP settings are changed must reboot in order to make new values active 40 Per VOICE 5 IPERVOICE SERVICES IPervoice features are provided as services Each
116. ata to be entered are the same as those described during the configuration phase with the Startup Wizard in Table 41 on page 176 To execute the operation press the button Confirm Decoder name Decoder number Confirm Cancel Name Code Figure 225 System maintenance Entry of Decoder data W Warning after adding a column device the system data must be downloaded to the device if required using a Netbook or a SmartPhone as described in the chapter Column Devices Configuration on page 157 263 Per VOICE 13 7 DELETING DEVICES AND OTHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS Differently from devices replacement and adding operations there are no different procedures to delete IP devices or column devices The same procedure is also used for other system components that are not hardware devices but are used to describe the IPervoice system structure These are in this case blocks stairs floors and apartments 13 7 1 DELETING IP AND COLUMN DEVICES The first step is performed by selecting the device to be deleted from the devices tree of IPervoice FrontEnd in Figure 226 as an example there is the list of decoders associated to the Gateway West Tower abe t Technical Guide System nf z Time Profiles i Primary call module Primary entry panel E in Biocks Name Number E a1 east Block Decoder 1 Delete E In Main Block Panou Ealse E a west Block Deo Ratede He Decodert 4 Delete B West
117. ation Dip switch for programming apartment station number 81 Per VOICE 7 6 2 BUTTON FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT In IPervoice system apartment stations are provided with some buttons used to perform special functions For some buttons these functions are configured by default and cannot be changed other buttons as described in the chapter Apartments Configuration paragraphs Call Buttons on page 188 and Special Functions on page 189 can be programmed according to user requirements If more buttons are needed an additional button module 1083 96 can be added to video door phones SIGNO 1740 1 and 1740 40 The Figure 32 shows the position of each function button for the three apartment stations models in use ee Pl z J armel Figure 32 Apartment stations configuration Main buttons position Each button can be associated to two different functions that are activated according to current operating status In idle state when the apartment station is not in communication with other devices two different conditions are possible gt Handset on hook gt Handset off hook In this way the number of possible functions is almost twice as the number of available buttons The Table 12 shows the associations available for each apartment station The highlighted functions can be changed during system configuration phase as previously described 8 The video door phone MODO 1717 1 is n
118. ation procedure of the Bluetooth device 1039 56 in case of Symbian Mobile device is shown in the three images of Figure 121 Once the Bluetooth programming interface has been detected it is shown to the user select the item Conn to try a connection to the Bluetooth device In some cases as shown in the image on the centre the PDA could require a confirmation to the user before going to the next step by answering yes the security code will be requested like the previous passkey i e 0000 to establish the connection Once the code has been entered select the item OK to complete the operation and include the Bluetooth interface 1039 56 Programming Device in the known devices if the interface 1039 56 is replaced the identification procedure must be repeated It is also suggested to use a single programming interface the PDA cannot distinguish different units of the same type and so the download could not work properly Make sure the Bluetooth interface is activated on the PDA before starting the search operation 169 Bluetooth Codice protezione per Eevee 1039 56 Programming SoftMobile diusarele De applicazioni di NA 123 connettivita 0000 Consentire a Figure 121 SoftMobile Symbian version Bluetooth programming interface identification and pairing CHECKING OF PARAMETERS DOWNLOADED TO THE COLUMN DEVICE Even though the application has confirmed the correct download of co
119. ation to be performed is a complete manual reboot by switching off and on all the IP system devices 13 3 CHECKING SERVER AND IP DEVICES FIRMWARE VERSION Before performing operations for updating the system server and other IP devices firmware it is suggested to verify the system status This function is available with the FrontEnd by selecting from the main menu the item FW UPGRADE and then Check system consistency A screen as the one shown in Figure 208 will appear to the installer in case of mono site plant otherwise for multi site installation Figure 209 will be shown Check system consistency Device name Device type Status Actual fw Expected fw Date Status fw Vesta House Gateway Gateway ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Vesta House Call module ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Server Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 amp COMPLETED w N15 Switchboard Switchboard ALIVE 1 5 6 3 1 5 6 3 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w N10 Switchboard Switchboard ALIVE 1 5 6 3 1 5 6 3 2012 06 29 COMPLETED wW NOT Switchboard Switchboard ALIVE 1 5 6 3 1 5 6 3 2012 06 29 COMPLETED Figure 208 System maintenance Checking of IP devices firmware version standard installation 249 fin Check system consistency J Device name Device type Status Actual tw Expected tw Date Status tw w Vesta House Gateway Gateway ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Vesta House Call modul
120. ations but it is not updated as the other servers in the Multi Site system This feature is used in special situations as network maintenance that can cause a not proper connection among the servers Update Refresh of the selected site operating state The two buttons Activate and Deactivate allow to activate or deactivate Multi Site mode for all the sites in the list The deactivation operation does not delete local configuration data of each site as in case of Delete operation described above allowing to use the sites as stand alone ADDING A NEW SITE To add a new site click on the button Add new site under the title the display will show a window as in Figure 195 Cancel Figure 195 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Adding a site to the system 240 Per VOICE In the text box under the title bar enter the IP address of the IPervoice server to be added to the system and press the button Add on the right of the box In the list below the FrontEnd will enter the new site showing its name IP address and operating state The operation can be repeated for each site to be added At the end press the button Ok to close the window the site will be visible in the summary list as shown in Figure 194 W Warning A site can be added only if the state in the list is ok if the site can not be reached the operation can not be carried out 12 8 SOFTWARE USERS CONF
121. ax number of Maximum number of concurrent audio video 5 concurrent audio video communications calls Allowed values from 1 to maxV where maxV is calculated by the system according to the assigned bandwidth on the IP network Max number of Maximum number of concurrent audio communications 15 concurrent audio only Allowed values from 1 to maxA where maxA is calculated by E calls the system according to the assigned bandwidth on the IP network Table 15 Advanced parameters for system configuration Once all the required data has been entered by clicking the button Next page the wizard goes to the IP CAT5 Gateways configuration step To change this feature the user must access the FrontEnd with System Administrator rights For further details see paragraph Software Users Configuration on page 246 Per VOICE 8 3 3 IP CAT5 GATEWAY CONFIGURATION With the IP CAT5 gateways configuration the Startup Wizard starts the real devices installation The list displayed to the installer is shown in Figure 42 Only devices not yet configured are in the list to configure them select the desired device and click the button Next page The system will display in sequence for each selected gateway the detail page where all the required data can be entered Name Gateway East Tower IP address 192 168 2 4 MAC address 00 1E 0 00 0C 1C FW version 0 4 2 5 Device status UNKNOWN U
122. ay is off and the door lock release command is deactivated also the one performed using the exit switch button The upgrade phase is performed by the server in parallel on all devices in order to minimize the time in which the system is not available To check that the automatic upgrade has been successful verify on all listed IP devices the columns Actual fw and Expected Fw they must contain the same version The column Status fw must display Completed t 1 Because the FrontEnd can detect if the upgrade has been successful but not if it has failed tf the upgrade state of a device remains in condition PROGRESS for more than 10 minutes it is possible to force a manual upgrade by pressing the button Upgrade near the concerned device 254 Per VOICE 13 4 2 IPERVOICE SERVERS UPGRADE IN MULTI SITE MODE In multi site mode the operator must indicate on which servers must be installed the firmware upgrade Figure 215 The default and recommended provides that the update process is executed on all servers in the system However in special circumstances as in the case of a server that has been suspended you may need a partial update in order to align all the servers to the same firmware so it can be ensured the proper functioning of the entire system fin l parada firmware Steps introduction Upload firmware file Upgrade End recommended that you backup yo
123. ble disk space gt Video card compatible with Microsoft Windows Vista 32 bit Home Premium or Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit Home Premium Professional or Ultimate 1024 x 768 pixel min resolution USB Port 1 optional for the connection of encoder 125 Ethernet Interface 10 100 Mbit s Bluetooth Interface suggested to use embedded programming functions for column devices 11 gt Internet Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher 117 It is important to check settings of Windows Vista and Windows 7 UAC module protection which must be configured as follows gt Microsoft Windows Vista UAC disabled gt Microsoft Windows 7 UAC in standard configuration default t16 The Bluetooth interface on the host PC must support Stack Bluetooth Windows in order that SA FE can use tt It is suggested to check compatibility before buying it 7 UAC Acronym for User Access Control Microsoft protection module for Windows Vista which manages PC users rights in order to avoid the execution of dangerous software or system data or components damages 2719 14 2 PRE INSTALLATION CHECKS UPDATES Before starting the installation procedure described below check that on the PC there is not any previous installation of IPervoice sa fe application In this case remove the old version before installing the new one and remove manually the installation folder Antivirus software could compromise the result of
124. bled to use these functions To access to these functions expand in the devices tree the concerned call module and select the item Doors The Figure 78 shows the doors list before and after the configuration 3 The Operation must be performed both for the main call modules included inthe item Primary call modules and for the secondary ones included in the related item Blocks 129 Per VOICE n E Door name Door Number Door name Door Number Pedestrian 0 Delete Vehicle entrance gate 1 Delete Figure 78 Advanced configuration List of doors managed by the IP Call Module By pressing the button Add a door access to the page where the configuration data can be entered Figure 79 Main door Figure 80 Vehicle entrance the installer has two options gt Enter the required data this is the typical case the system will create a new door with the data entered by the user gt Press the button Use existing door this case is used in case of advanced functions dedicated to the access control In particular it is used if there are zones where it is necessary to have entry and exit doors sharing the same control unit that is the call module output or the IP key reader output Hame Pedestian Humber 0 Main door is Door profile Custom Type Secret Door time 2 Door Forced Alarm EI Max Door Opening Time W 30 a Time profile i z Not assigned ons ein Drive
125. c code or Door Code For each user enabled for this function a unique code can be defined that must be associated to the passages to be opened on the relevant call modules A code can be programmed to allow the opening of the pedestrian door only of the driveway gate only or both 49 Per VOICE AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK RELEASE This function is managed by the user from his apartment station and allows to automatically open the door of the call module that issued the call the communication is active for the call pickup time after which it is interrupted if the user has not answered DOOR OPEN SIGNALLING Some apartment stations such as 1707 1 IMAGO or 1717 1 MODO are able to signal to the user that the door is open This information is sent from the door unit through a suitable input that can be connected to a magnetic micro contact installed on the entrance door When the visitor opens the door and comes in the micro contact is opened and the call module immediately sends the state information to the apartment station in communication On the apartment station the led that signals the open door is on until the door is closed COMMUNICATIONS TO THE IP NETWORK The audio and video door phone calls are mainly originated by the call modules installed on the IP network such as the 1039 14 and reach the selected apartment station such as the 1740 40 on the CATS riser An inverse communication can also be performed i e f
126. call modules VoIP telephones and terminals inside the apartments These communications can be carried out by the door phone provided connected to the PC USB port and audio mini jack connectors or by a headset with microphone in this case the USB port is not needed A touch screen PC can be used to manage the switchboard Minimum requirements 1 GHz compatible with Windows Vista or Windows 7 with 1 Gbyte RAM and 250 MByte disk e Audio card compatible with Vista Home Premium e Video card compatible with Windows Vista or Windows 7 minimum resolution 1024 x 768 pixel e Webcam compatible with Windows Vista or Windows 7 e 1 USB port for the connection of the external door phone e 10 100 Mbit s Ethernet interface 19 Main technical characteristics 1 RJ45 Ethernet port for the connection to the IP network 1 RJ11 port for the connection to PSTN network Power supply by means of a provided power supply unit Operating temperature range 5 40 C Dimensions 180 W x 225 H x 90 D mm Installation table top and wall mounting Main technical characteristics 1 RJ45 Ethernet port for the connection to IP network 1 RJ11 port for the connection of an analog telephone 1 RJ11 port for the connection to the PSTN network Power supply with provided power supply unit Operating temperature range 5 40 C Dimensions 180 W x 225 H x 90 D mm Installation table top and wall mounting VoIP Tel
127. call buttons behaviour present in the apartment station Call Buttons Not assigned Already Assigned to call outside the apartment Door Phone The system performs the configured command selected from the pull down menu when the intercom call button is pressed Available values are Call button 1 to Call button 7 These buttons can be configured and the configuration will be activated when the buttons are pressed with the apartment station handset off hook or the audio button pressed in hands free models Default condition when the button is pressed the system does not send any command The button is already used for external calls for ex switchboards VolP telephones and it cannot be used for other purposes The call is sent by the intercom interface to the apartment station selected in the pull down menu Because the conversation use apartment resources only the riser column audio channel will not be occupied Table 52 Intercom Interface Apartment station configuration data 33 For information about buttons in apartment stations see the paragraph Button Function Assignment on page 68 208 Per VOICE 11 7 IP APARTMENTS CONFIGURATION In order to add or configure an IP apartment select the desired floor inside the belonging block stair from the devices tree as shown in Figure 166 ES Fee san Bick EN AF west Biock By viesi Star E mo Secondary cal modua p Secondary e
128. cation code Required field if the user has selected Used key code in hexadecimal format Fixed length 8 characters Time profile assigned to door lock release codes or proximity keys that will select this access profile For information about time profiles access definition see chapter Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Access on page 214 Default value No time profile applied If selected it allows to define the validity start date of the door lock release code Before this date the code will not open the door Default value Not selected If selected it allows to define the validity end date of the door lock release code After this date the code will not open the door Default value Not selected If selected the door lock release code will be disabled and will not allow to open the door Default value Not selected 12 4 2 ENTERING NAMES IN MULTI SITE MODE In Multi Site system entering access data with door lock release code or proximity key must be repeated for all the concerned sites To perform this operation expand the detail section of each site see Figure 187 on page 230 by clicking on the image beside the site name This section will show the available doors where access modes can be configured W Note the proximity key will be entered only once for all the sites where access enabling will be configured while the door lock release code can also be different for each site be
129. cause this information in opposition to the proximity key is not unique in a Multi Site system 229 Resident Last Name Resident First Name Phone number Accessiblity level l Access prote ee key code coms Color None Time profile Time profile a Start validity 2011 12 14 17 14 E E Start vatiaity 2011 12 14 17 14 E End validity 2012 12 14 17 14 End validity 2012 12 14 17 14 Suspended C Suspended W Warning Figure 187 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Entering external persons if the user selects a previously entered Access Profile as described in paragraph 12 1 2 on page 214 all the sites receive its configurations while if the user selects an Access Profile Custom data concerning Time Profile Start and End Validity and Suspended must be manually entered for each site where the user is enabled to operate 230 Per VOICE 12 5 USER CUSTOM FIELDS IPervoice allows to extend External Persons data model with customized information These data are not relevant for Pervoice system which will store and associate them to each user defined in the system To access User custom fields management select the related item from the devices tree as shown in Figure 188 ote Technical Gude System F Time Profile Access CS amp ccess Profies r a Door Profiles 4 Primary cal module Label Mandatory
130. ccessed and the previously indicated menu item could not be selected without accessing IPervoice server 283 Per VOICE 14 5 1 SWITCHING TO MOBILE MODE LOCAL MODE After selecting from the FrontEnd menu the item SWITCH TO MOBILE IPervoice asks the user to confirm operating mode change Figure 250 If the answer is yes it starts all operations needed to launch IperVoice sa fe The application will be switched to Local Mode In Local Mode you will be able to unplug your PC from the Ipervoice Network and use the Configuration Application locally In Local Mode you will be able to bring your PC away for the configuration of Decoders Intercom Interfaces and Lift Interface of your System via Bluetooth keep configuring locally the system and bring the configuration later on the Server Are you sure you want to switch in Local Mode Figure 250 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Window used to confirm switching to Mobile mode The first operation is a consistency check in order to perform data synchronization from Pervoice server to lperVoice sa fe local database Switch to mobile a A Synchronization started A Application check need update g Figure 251 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Switching to Mobile mode consistency check If an inconsistency is detected between the two databases the user will be asked about the way to operate Figure 252 Switch to mobile Data synchronization is needed befo
131. ccording to the device type please refer to the user manual provided with the Netbook or PDA used In any case consider the following information PDA with Symbian operating system PDA with Windows Mobile operating system Netbook or Notebook SoftMobile software installation must always be performed on the memory card never on the device main memory Also the file containing the system data config dat used to program the column devices must be saved on the memory card not in the application folder e g in a folder named Pervoice There are no constraints for SoftWMobile software installation nor for the folder of config dat file containing the system data e g IPervoice At present the Pervoice system supports Classic or Professional Version 6 of Windows Mobile operating system the standard version is not yet Supported There are no constraints they are portable Personal Computers Windows XP and Vista operating systems are supported in the available versions Table 39 SoftMobile Software Installation and use information W Warning At present there is no SoftMobile software version for Netbook and Notebook but it will be soon available 159 Per VOICE 10 1 2 SYSTEM DATA DOWNLOAD To PDA AND SMARTPHONE DEVICE Once the configuration made by means of the FrontEnd is completed the system data can be collected to be sent to the PDA This operation must be performed with the same PC u
132. cierge Switchboard Figure 1 Digital audio video transmission To solve this problem appropriate mathematic algorithms are used that allow the information to be compressed while it is sent through the network Once arrived this information can be decompressed using an inverse process and is then ready for use These algorithms are called CODEC code decode and are substantially software programs or hardware devices that digitally encode and or decode an audio or video signal in order to save it ona storage support from where it can later be recalled for reading or as in the typical case of Pervoice transmitted on the IP communication channel In encoding decoding phase the codecs also perform the compression and or decompression of the data reducing the data volume in order to make the stream of encoded data easier to be transmitted Per VOICE The compression of the data allows us to use less channel bandwidth for their transmission leaving more space for similar transmissions or other data necessary for the system operation Technological progress has permitted the development of even more efficient codecs able to ensure a high quality level high resolution of images number of frames per second keeping the amount of data needed in order to send the information on the network very low IPervoice uses two different standard codecs the first one is specific for video information the second is for audio data
133. closing of a communication on the main channel in case of a new incoming call is managed by the system using a series of choice methods There are two application diagrams the first is used if the incoming call is a video door phone call audio and video the second if the call is a door phone call audio only The Table 5 e la Table 6 indicate the application of the choice methods for the two conditions described above Typically the system tries to establish the new communication with the same required characteristics i e if the incoming call is a video door phone type the system will try to establish an audio video communication closing if possible another communication in progress on the channel 1 If this is not possible the system will degrade the incoming call to an audio only call and will use the second audio channel if present Only if this method cannot be applied the system will notify to the user the busy state Diagram 1 Video door phone incoming call audio video Uninterruptible wate In standby Interruptible Not available In standby Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Interruptible Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Uninterruptible Channel 2 audio Channel 2 audio Busy Table 5 Choice method in case of video door phone call Diagram 2 Door phone incoming call audio only Uninterruptible a In standby Interruptible Nee available In standby Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Interruptible Channel 2 Channel 2 Cha
134. compared to FrontEnd in server mode The two buttons Program via BT and Read via BT are used to transfer configuration data to the decoder and vice versa using the Bluetooth interface 125 This procedure can also be used to add a new device 290 Per VOICE _ Decoder name Decoder Decoder number 1 Device status ALIVE Confirm E Program wa BT Read from BT i Cancel Name Code Apartmentt At Delete Apartment AJ Delte Apartments AJ Delete Apartments As Delete Figure 262 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage 4 user decoder configuration page By pressing the button Program via BT a new dialog window will appear shown in Figure 263 If the Bluetooth device has not been acquired yet press the button Search to start the identification procedure Bluetooth Programming Interface identification on page 292 Figure 263 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Bluetooth interface selection If the Bluetooth device has already been acquired its name will appear in the pull down menu by clicking on the button Connect data will be transferred to the 4 user decoder If the procedure has been successful the dialog window will show 291 Pe r VOICE Figure 264 Stand Alone FrontEnd use Bluetooth programming result 14 9 2 BLUETOOTH PROGRAMMING INTERFACE IDENTIFICATION If the Bluetooth device 1039 56 is used for the first time the identification procedure is automat
135. configuration data Name Name assigned to the intercom interface Required field Max length 32 characters Number Intercom interface number inside the apartment The number can be selected from a pull down menu available values are 0 1 2 3 The FrontEnd only show not assigned numbers Table 51 Intercom Interface Configuration data After this preliminary phase it is possible to configure apartment stations As shown in Figure 164 to add a new apartment station associated to the interface 1039 36 click on Add a door phone The FrontEnd will show the apartment station configuration page Name Intercom Number 0 7 Device status ALIVE Polling Confirm Cancel 3 Door phone list Add a door phone Number Type Figure 164 Intercom Interface Configuration Adding an apartment station 207 DPO Number 0 0 defined as Master door phone Type Hands free video door phone Room monitor enabled Yes Wo SIP address B251F1A300 Device status ALIVE Polling F Call buttons Call button 1 Not assigned Already Assigned to call outside the apartment Door Phone Confirm Cancel Figure 165 Intercom Interface Configuration Apartment Stations configuration data Besides data described in Table 50 in the chapter Apartment Stations Configuration in case of apartment station associated to an intercom interface it is possible to configure the
136. configuration file config dat must be regenerated as described later and downloaded to the PDA all the devices subject to changes must be reprogrammed 173 Concerned f Parameter euti Configuration at page Devices to be programmed Time T1 1039 34 and Pag 97 All the devices 1039 34 and 1039 36 in the Call Pickup time 1039 36 Site Configuration system Time T2 guaranteed conversation time 1039 34 and Page 97 All the devices 1039 34 and 1039 36 in the 1039 36 Site Configuration system Wizard page 102 1039 34 Devices configuration page 176 Wizard Page 103 and The devices 1039 34 where the parameters There are the following cases e Only the devices 1039 34 of apartments where the parameters Call Buttons have changed for apartment stations connected to 1039 34 The devices 1039 34 and 1039 36 of apartments where the parameters Call Buttons have changed for apartment stations connected to 1039 36 l l The devices 1039 34 of apartments where the Alarm Interface presence 1039 34 Wizard page 104 farme erAbrm inen ice hi been hangad Intercom Number Intercom interface 1039 36 identifier Decoder Number 4 user decoder identifier The devices 1039 34 where the parameter Number has changed Call codes of apartment station programmable 1039 34 and Devices configuration buttons 1039 36 page 188 Devices configuration The devices 1039 36 where the parameter page 207 Number has been changed
137. control panels 1061 connection Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption 1 5 mA Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 108 W x 142 H x 37 D mm Installation inside the control panels 1061 Intercom interface for CAT5 1039 36 This device allows the intercom function among different stations of the same apartment so an intercom communication can be made without using the riser column The device can be exclusively connected to the derived bus of the 4 user decoder 1039 34 through a power supply 1039 20 To increase the apartment stations number up to 4 interfaces 1039 36 can be daisy chain connected Alarm interface for CAT5 1039 61 This device allows the alarm signals generated by the alarm control panel 1061 to be sent to the concierge switchboard of IPervoice system WX Warning The interface works only if used with the control panel 1061 004 or 1061 006 and not with other intruder alarm systems 37 Site infrastructure MULTI SITE ARCHITECTURE To implement a Multi Site system the IP network is used to connect many Pervoice systems called Sites Block diagram of Figure 11 shows a solution to implement the Multi 4 6 Multi Site Level whi ee ee er ee meee nash dalaha Ta wll te Sede L ree PFEP ea competence a a l iPervoice Site Server ye fete E ss 2 262 6222 26 62 4 F E E iPervoice Site Serve
138. d according to national installation standards Pay special attention to wiring operations and particularly to crimp operations of RJ45 connectors on CAT5 cable in order to ensure a correct and reliable electric connection that is fundamental for correct operation of the system 7 1 EXTERNAL LEVEL STREET SIDE IPervoice External level composed by IP network typically concerns the street side that is the part of the system placed outside the building or referred to the external perimeter of the building chapter The External Level the IP network on page 14 The cable used for the data is usually laid in conduits buried under the road surface so more exposed to humidity and seepage It is suggested to use a black Urmet cable 1039 90 protected by a humidity proof polyurethane sheath that provides the strength needed to install it in road pipes Other cables can be used only if they are CAT5 certified Please remember that the standard CATS cable normally used contrary to Urmet cable 1039 90 can NOT be placed inside conduits where other 230V cables are laid The use of a cable with characteristics different from those described below is not allowed Y Warning The cable 1039 90 must always be laid in suitable pipes it must never be directly buried In the following Table 10 are summarized all the main characteristics of 1039 90 cable Ora higher category as for example CATS5e 72 Per VOICE Cable type e Doubl
139. d External person groups fa User custom fieis Oo j gt z 82 Athletes Vilage NO3 FW3 0 o o Figure 174 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Access profiles list The FrontEnd will show the list of existing profiles which can be changed by clicking on the profile name To create a new profile click on Add profile under the page title W Note the column Code contains the profile code this is used to add residents to access profiles during data import phase described in paragraph System Maintenance and Utility Functions Data Import on page 268 216 Per VOICE Dn ie ae 5 m Name Main Block Access Profile V Used door code V Used key code Time profile e Time profile E Startvatidity 2011 05 17 09 04 E Startvalidity 2011 05 17 09 04 F End validity 2012 05 17 09 04 ts End validity 2012 05 17 09 04 Confirm Figure 175 Advanced functions configuration Access profile definition As already mentioned each access profile allows to define a standard behaviour for management of door lock release codes proximity keys or both According to selections one or more passages doors can be assigned to the profile to do this doors must be selected from the system list The following table shows which data can be configured and their meaning Used door code If selected this means that the profile concerns door lock release codes Default
140. d module in the section i Primary entry panel in the first level of the tree if operations concern a secondary module search for it in the belonging block stair in the item Blocks As for IP call module advanced configuration parameters are grouped into three different sections the 1 one dedicated to the user interface of the video door unit the 24 section used to assign Call buttons on the device and the 3rd section used to operate with IP special decoders 1039 80 9 3 1 INTERFACE OPTIONS This section is used to set configuration parameters of IP Video door unit user interface The next one shows the dedicated section on the FrontEnd when it has been expanded with the button near Interface options Interface options Micro 3dB v E m E Speakers 3dB eae Tones oFF Ef l Audio Messages OFF oj E S Camera Leds active yes No gt Call buttons Call button Special functions Confirm Reboot Cancel Figure 82 Advanced Configuration Options of IP video door unit user interface Table 32 describe information present in this section and respective values which can be changed Micro Microphone audio level it can t be changed 3dB oe Available values 5dB 3dB OdB 3dB 4dB 5dB Speakers Loudspeaker audio level it can t be changed 3dB Available values 5dB 3dB OdB 3dB 4dB 5dB a Tones Button tone volume OFF Available values OFF 5dB 3dB
141. d on each derived branch Max number of alarm interfaces 1039 61 for each apartment derived branch associated to alarm control panel 1061 004 or 1061 006 Table 8 Technical prescriptions distances extensions and max number of devices in a riser Max distances of main auxiliary connections TNE Wire section Description ae Max Distance minimum 4 user decoder floor call buttons 0 5 mm 50m 4 user decoder floor alarm signaling device 50m Call module pedestrian door electric lock main passage 100 m Call module entrance hall button 100 m Call module open door sensor 100 m IP key reader entrance hall button 100 m IP key reader open door sensor 100 m Table 9 Technical prescriptions max distances of main auxiliary connections This because the door phone is not provided with an RJ45 port used to connect another device in series l For further information refer to user manuals of each device Referred to Capacitive discharge output with 12Vac electric lock 71 Per VOICE 7 INSTALLATION PRESCRIPTIONS In order to ensure correct operation of IPervoice system the following installation prescriptions must be respected they will be described in this chapter However besides this specific information standard rules for a good installation must be followed for ensuring a sufficient protection against noise and a good system reliability All devices must be correctly installed and wire
142. d to the switchboard required field Maximum length 32 characters First name of the concierge if both first name and surname must be entered This is an optional field Maximum length 32 characters IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the switchboard Device unique physical address Obtained as shown in the previous Figure 54 Application software version of the concierge switchboard Device status detected by the system the status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Even though a switchboard usually does not belong to a Block a Stair and a Floor it must be provided with a topological code in order to be called by the other system devices The switchboard code is composed by all the four parts of the Topological code Block Stair and Floor can be selected from the pull down menus displayed near the single item to add an element click the respective button for ex Add Floor the last part must be entered by the installer and is composed by a unique alphanumeric code associated to the respective floor Fixed length 2 alphanumeric characters e g 01 C1 1C CS W Note it is suggested to create a virtual Block Stair and Floor where all the system switchboards will be included For example Block Common Devices CD Stair Switchboards SB Floor Switchboard Floor SF Table 24 Concierge Switchboard identification data 110 Per VOICE As for the Call Modules the en
143. d with PDA device or SmartPhone Warning the configuration file cannot be saved directly on the Mobile device so tt must be saved ina PC folder and then moved to the PDA 160 REFRESH STARTUP WIZARD DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE Nae Ma Device change Backup and restore BY nGiGyuten gt Figure 110 Download of system data to PDA Procedure start up The FrontEnd shows the page where the download can be started Figure 111 by clicking the button Download Dat file the browser opens a dialog window to choose the destination folder for example select the folder Desktop and press Save without changing the file name suggested by IPervoice f Write to Mobile It provides to the installer the ability to download all the programmable configurations of the system into a mobile device Download Datfile Figure 111 Download of system data to PDA config dat file download The last step consists of moving the config dat file now saved on PC to a specific PDA folder The Figure 112 shows an example where the file has been saved in the IPervoice folder on the PDA memory card To perform this operation use the functions of Windows Explorer to copy a file from one folder to another W Warning as previously described Symbian Mobile devices impose some limitations on the destination folder to be used for the config dat file it must be on the memory card not in the PDA intern
144. dary entry panel gt Gateway Main Tower 1 ES Fioors I Er VOICE Street level F Foor 1 F Floor 2 Q Floor 3 Gg Floor 4 G Floor 5 G Roof Level Right Stair n West Block Lift interface F Floors y Right Stair ne West Block Figure 38 System structure Blocks Stairs Floors Other devices such as main call modules video servers or IP key readers are not associated to a specific building They are placed on the building perimeter or in areas external to the buildings and they can be seen on the root i e on the structure first level The hierarchical structure defined above is also used to fill in the residents data i e people living in the apartments for populating the user directory In the IPervoice system the residents are included in the apartments so the data entry is performed apartment by apartment and is more user friendly The link between the residents and the hierarchical and topologic system structure block stair floor apartment can be used as shown later to make visible on the main and secondary call modules only the related residents In this way when the visitor uses the functions available on the call module to scroll the residents address book he will see only the residents associated to that module so the search will become easier 8 2 5 PRELIMINARY CHECKING Before starting IPervoice system configuration and start up make sure that all the system checking described in chap
145. de vi Back to main page Figure 70 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new VoIP telephone VoIP devices do not have specific configuration parameters as shown in Figure 70 and in detail in Table 29 the data to be entered is the name and the identification code 120 Name Firstname IP address MAC address FW version Device status VoIP Phone code W Warning i Er VOICE Name assigned to the telephone required field Maximum length 32 characters The First name if the fields are used to enter the first name and the surname The field is optional Maximum length 32 characters IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the telephone Device unique physical address Application software version of the telephone Device status detected by the system the status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD When a VolP telephone is installed in a common building area for example a gym a bar or a swimming pool and it does not belong to a Block a Stair and a Floor it must be provided with a topological code in order to be called by the other system devices The telephone code is composed by all the four parts of the Topological code Block Stair and Floor code can be selected from the pull down menus displayed near the similar items to add an element press the respective button for ex Add Floor the last part must be entered by the installer and it is composed by a unique
146. dentified press the button Replace to execute the procedure Figure 218 System maintenance Selection of the call module to be replaced W Warning After the replacement and the new configuration have been performed the IPervoice server checks the consistency of the firmware version installed in the new device and updates it automatically if necessary During this time the device will be out of order as described in the paragraph IP devices automatic upgrade on page 254 FURTHER NOTES ABOUT IP DEVICES REPLACEMENT In case of replacement of IP Gateway 1039 50 or column power supply units 1039 20 it could be necessary to repeat the procedure for adjusting the video signal as described in the paragraph Video Signal Adjustment on page 79 258 Per VOICE 13 5 2 COLUMN DEVICES REPLACEMENT The procedure for replacing a column device as for example a 4 user decoder 1039 34 consists in the following steps 1 Installation of the new device instead of the old one 2 Download of system configuration data to a SmartPhone or another mobile device 3 Programming with SmartPhone through Bluetooth interface 4 Checking of system data download to the column device The first step concerns as in the previous case the replacement of the device included wiring operations To download system data file config dat to the mobile device refer to paragraph System Data Download to PDA and Smartphone device o
147. device in the configuration phase FW version Version of application Firmware on the call module 105 i Er VOICE Device status Device status detected by the system The status can be e UNKNOWN The device is not configured or not yet polled by the system e POLL IN PROGRESS The server is polling the device to obtain status information e ALIVE The device has been configured and operates correctly e DEAD The device has been configured but it does not communicate with the server Call Module type Call module use mode that can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are Primary Secondary W Warning if the option Secondary is selected the respective block and stair must be added as shown in the following figure WEBRSS ESE SSS ESS r Sassposase Call Module type Secondary v Call Module Code Block code B1 a Add a block Staircode Si Addastair Table 22 IP Call Module identification data W Warning in order to activate the electrical lock of the passage to be controlled the Door must be added to the IP Call Module Perform this operation following the procedure described in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration IP Call Module Doors on page 129 106 Per VOICE 8 3 5 IP VIDEO DOOR UNIT CONFIGURATION ENTRY PANEL After the call module configuration has been completed Wizard shows the list of IP Video door units 1039 72 al
148. devices are properly connected requirements have been met and repeat the operation following the described sequence Figure 153 Automatic Key Code Wizard Encoder activated Figure 154 Automatic Key Code Wizard Encoder not connected 8 Now it can be downloaded following information on http www oracle com technetwork java javase downloads if the check mark tick is not selected the Encoder will not work properly The application which controls the Encoder 125 is based on a Java Applet inside the Internet browser used to connect to IPervoice FrontEnd 200 Per VOICE JAVA PANEL CONFIGURATION Java application Applet used to manage the encoder could be updated after a new version of IPervoice is installed see IPervoice Server Upgrade on page 251 The PC used for connection to FrontEnd downloads the Applet from Pervoice server Only the first time it is used the old version must be deleted before downloading the new one This operation is performed from Java control panel inside Windows control panel shown by the following icon Java 32 bit Generale Aggiornamento Java Protezone Avanzate Informazioni su Imposiazson proxy Grete Viguaitre le informacion suia versione del pannello d controle Java Use impostazioni proxy del browser predefinito per la connessione a Internet es apocrine Lee server proxy Inpostanon dreie Le impostazioni d rete vengono utirrate p
149. e required field Max length 32 characters Zone type It can be selected from the pull down menu Available values e Anti pass back Typical operating mode if a user enter the zone he e Counting e Both e Suspend must go out before entering again The behaviour can be modified adding a timing In this mode persons present in the zone are counted The counter is incremented during access and decremented during exit There are no limits for an identified user who wants to enter another zone without leaving the first one The counter is not incremented Both previous modes are applied The zone is disabled but keeps the previously configured settings The zone can be enabled again at any time Default values Anti pass back Available only in Anti pass back and Both mode it is the time in minutes which must elapse in order that the same user can pass any entrance door without leaving the zone Default value 30 min The value 0 indicates infinite 234 Threshold Doors list Input doors Output doors W Note i er VOICE Available in Counting and Both mode it defines the max number of users inside the zone Default value 10 List of doors passages which can be used as entrance or exit doors W Warning a door can t be an entrance and exit door for the same zone When a door is added to one of the following list input doors or output doors the system deletes the door from the other lists of a
150. e ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Server Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 9 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED Remote server 10 151 7 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED wW Remote server 10 151 4 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2072 06 29 COMPLETED wW Remote server 10 151 3 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 27 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 4 COMPLETED a Remote server 10 151 26 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 2 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 15 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 14 1 Sever ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 13 1 Sever ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 COMPLETED w Remote server 10 151 10 1 Server ALIVE 3 2 0 24 3 2 0 24 2012 06 29 amp COMPLETED w N15 Switchboard Switchboard ALIVE 1 5 6 3 1 5 6 3 2012 06 29 4 COMPLETED w N10 Switchboard Switchboard ALIVE 1 5 6 3 1 5 6 3 2012 06 29 COMPLETED we NOT Switchboard Switchboard ALIVE 1 5 6 3 1 5 6 3 2012 06 29 COMPLETED Figure 209 System maintenance Checking of IP devices firmware version multi site installation The list includes the main information about system IP devices useful to check their operating status bef
151. e operations concern a main module it must be searched in the section Primary Call Module in the first tree level if the operations concern a secondary module it must be searched in the respective block stair in the item Blocks The advanced configuration parameters are grouped in three different sections the 1 only present in primary modules used for the association of one or more residents directories the re dedicated to the call module user interface and the 3 used to deal with the IP special decoders 1039 80 ooo gt 37 Technical Guide System o Main Entrance Call Module y Time Profiles Change to secondary Hl Ss Primary call module E S Main Entrance Call Module ic Inf PF Bas c intos E Doors Frimory Gaty panel Cali Module Name Main Entrance Call Module n Blocks Cidin iaria SIP Address 00_1 _E0 00_0B_A9 key readers IP Address 192 168 2 2 aii Special decoders MAC Address 00 1E 0 00 0B A9 D Switchboards FW version 0 4 2 6 ev S Gr Pe tt Device status ALIVE Polling 1 video servers i O L lw ae gt ze External person groups Block group oe New device lL2 m I ee A h pe p F Zones Confirm Reboot Cancel Figure 73 Advanced configuration IP Call Module 124 Per VOICE 9 2 1 BLOCK GROUP As already mentioned this section can be configured only if the call module is specified as Main it allows the rules used by the system to a
152. e sheathed cable with 4 unshielded twisted pairs UTP CAT 5E e External polyurethane sheath e Use allowed also in pipes containing 230 V conductors Electric and physical characteristics External sheath diameter and colour 5 7 0 25mm BLACK Solid copper wires Red copper wire diameter 0 51mm 24AWG Min radius of curvature 80 mm Table 10 Technical prescriptions Cable 1039 90 technical characteristics Even though the double sheath allows the coexistence with 230V cables ensuring the correct electric insulation it is suggested not to lay the CAT5 cable near 230V and 400V power supply cables that generate strong electromagnetic fields If the above mentioned rules are not respected the following problems may occur typical of all video door phone systems that cannot be foreseen e Errors during data transmission among devices resulting in impossibility to perform calls e Poor image quality with loss of details double image etc e Noisy video image e Noisy audio signal 7 1 1 WIRING INSTRUCTIONS To crimp RJ45 connectors on IP 1039 90 black cable it is necessary to follow some advices in order to ensure a correct electric connection for all conductors Follow the procedure below gt Crimp the black cable 1039 90 only on RJ45 connectors with URMET logo 1039 100 gt Remove the black insulating sheath by pulling the two rip cords in order to crimp the RJ45 connector and easily insert the cable into the flush
153. e the encoder device The Encoder 125 doesn t need any special configuration but the connected PC must be provided with Java 2 Platform Standard Edition This can be freely downloaded from the Internet site Oracle com If this operation has been correctly performed a page as the one shown in Figure 152 will be displayed The user must select the item Always trust content from this publisher as shown by the arrow in order to start the application which will read identification data of proximity keys Automatic Key Code wizard i P pip 1 is athenzione protezone Impossibile verificare la firma digitale 4 AALTO Brg dell applicazione Eseguire l applicazione First Hame Jol Apartment Ag i Home AuiokeyCodepmet l Autore NON VERIFICATO FDI MATELEC Da Atine 192 168 1 1 Considera sempre attenckbdl i contenuti ch questo autores ay Pers P tsesa La Greg daise non pod emare verfioyis da ura fonte accredits Esaguire s00 se E rient atlencibls origine Liberii informan del pppicione Backtoselecichoice page Back to main page Skip Figure 152 Automatic Key Code Wizard Encoder activation If the activation phase has been successful when the button Execute is pressed the encoder image will be displayed with the device firmware version Figure 153 under the image Otherwise the image shown in Figure 154 will be displayed If the second image appears check that
154. e the following Drive output on call The system executes the command on the configured outputs after a video door phone call Not assigned Default condition this function doesn t affect system outputs Outputs The function is active when it occurs the outputs selected from the list Output List Figure 84 are activated Command modes can be e ON the output is activated when the event occurs e OFF the output is deactivated when the event occurs e TOGGLE when the event occurs the output toggles its status W Warning ON and OFF options are available only if the output has been configured in bistable mode 136 9 3 4 Doors Also the IP video door unit can command two doors usually pedestrian door and gate with the same modes and characteristics as the previously described IP call module For programming procedures see the paragraph 9 2 5 Doors on page 129 Figure 85 shows the mask used to configure passages on module 1039 72 Name pelP pedestrian door Humber 0 Main door x Door profite Custom i Type Se crel l Door time 2 3 Door Forced Alarm EI Max Door Opening Time 30 3 Time profile Not assigned Outputs Confirm Cancel Figure 85 Advanced Configuration Door programming of IP video door units 137 Per VOICE 9 4 CONCIERGE SWITCHBOARD The concierge switchboard advanced configuration parameters are split into two sections the 1 where t
155. e the item by clicking on this icon the tree will be expanded showing its contents to close it click the icon B se Technical Guide System 7 i Time Profile Access g Time Profile Access 6 Gy Access Profiles i E Time Frofie Access of ll Door Profies Y l H o Primary call module g Hoidays z F Primary entry panel 3 C9 Access Profies as Blocks 6 D Profies fee East Biock Door Profies Cal Module a fla Man Block met afal West Block a o Door Profies Key Reader a i Te ey y Wiest Stair Ayn j Switchboards sa p Pn a eo Secondary Cal modu on om es la SWL_NO Er arij me Secondary entry panel fy SWLNIS i Gateway West Tower ails z mee 23 Floors hy SWLNI a a r a fela Common Devices gt External person groups t PA kd s da t iJe i HAa User custom heks m vr i oe E ny PEAJE m Gay Rey eaders TA a ee oc AMEGIS VEC NUS Five ao 5 Ho o Special decoders o O Eg hm j Athietes 4 F y Switchboards o s o 6 F IP VolP phones tui Anes vas o 0 zasa o gor Video servers D lt gt a A oe ternal person oF atis External person groups New device ie F Zones re ii 1 1 ig oO 6 me n lt e i pe 8 a T F z iL T T L E E E E Figure 37 Devices tree in Mono and Multi site mode As shown in Figure 37 the contents
156. e use with Internet browser the user interface and the available functions can use the Stand Alone FrontEnd easily As shown in Figure 258 the structure is the same already described in this manual This chapter will not treat functions already described in previous chapters For example for search functions use see paragraph System Maintenance and Utility Functions Search on page 273 for call module configuration see paragraph IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration IP Call Module on page 124 287 Q Door Pro Tiy Elk West Block Block name 5 Eben East Beck Block code B5 Bat E Pa Lett Miar C nirm Cancel v y 1 Figure 258 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Application structure The following special characteristics of Stand Alone version will be described gt Addition and configuration of new IP devices gt Column devices configuration via embedded Bluetooh interface 14 8 ADDING AND CONFIGURING NEW IP DEVICES Local mode or Mobile allows to add and configure IP devices even if these are not yet detected and identified by the system In Server mode the new IP device to be added must be connected to the system and detected by IPervoice system 124 In IperVoice sa fe only device type call module VoIP telephone and so on and MAC address are required Follow the procedure below From the devices tree select the item New device the Stand Alone FrontEnd will show
157. ead proximity keys If this operation is performed for the first time follow instructions described in the previous paragraph Selection Two options are available as search filter Residents and Externals If selected the first one allows to assign keys to residents the second one to externals W Note To continue one of the available options must be selected Residents The section is shown if this item has been selected There are four filter categories which can be activated by four pull down menus These allow to refine the search of residents to be assigned They are e Block to select a special block e Stairs to limit the search to a specific stair e Floor to limit the search to a single floor e Apartment to select a special apartment Externals As in the previous case the section is shown only if this item has been selected In this case the restriction is applied to the belonging group of externals The selection is performed from a pull down menu Options In this section there are two options e Skips persons who have already a key code configured e ask for confirmation before overwriting the existing code The first one allows to select if to skip or not persons who have already an assigned code the second one to asks for confirmation before overwriting an existing code 199 ENCODER CONFIGURATION The first time the Automatic Key Code Wizard is used some preliminary operations must be performed in order to us
158. ecoder 1039 34 allows the connection of up to 4 apartments max where 4 apartment stations max or up to 16 intercom apartment stations can be daisy chain connected using the intercom interface 1039 36 The decoder provides a floor call function for each apartment an auxiliary alarm signal one per decoder it can also manage an optional second audio channel to allow an additional door phone conversation in the riser column Lift Interface for CAT5 1039 37 The Lift Interface is directly connected to the riser column and is provided with a matrix of 24 relays that can be individually activated It is directly managed by the system server the relays activate the lift control unit after user actions on different devices It cannot be directly accessed by the user The operating parameters are programmed with the Bluetooth programming interface 1039 56 It is also provided with a RS485 serial line fully isolated which can be used for future expansions 29 Per VOICE 4 4 THEINTERNAL LEVEL THE IP APARTMENTS Figure 8 shows the wiring inside the apartments connected to Pervoice IP network From the IP switch that must provided with PoE Ethernet ports e g the 1039 45 it is possible to reach apartments up to 4 in this case Now it is possible to connect the iModo device 1717 2 as advanced apartment terminal used to access all IPervoice basic and advanced functions If it is possible to access Internet using the apartment
159. ed order for installation and configuration of the system devices It is suggested to follow this order even if the installation is performed without the Wizard In particular there are some devices that cannot be installed if they depend on other ones this is the case of devices present in the building riser column and inside the apartments The following table can be useful to check the dependencies between the different devices and the system structure 4 user decoder 1039 34 IP CATS Gateway and associated Floor Apartment devices door phones video door phones alarm Associated 4 user decoder interfaces intercom interfaces Video Server oss noe Table 14 Dependency constraints for Pervoice devices configuration 95 8 3 2 SITE CONFIGURATION Once the wizard has started the first step to be performed concerns the input of system configuration parameters W Note the information required by the Startup Wizard during this configuration step can also be changed later in the Frontend main page wenvoice 20 Mozilla Firefox File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia Segnalibri Strumenti Aiuto o C X B SB httev192 168 1 1 PHP statupWizerdSite php Pi visitati _ Come iniziare a Ultime notizie Disattiva Cookie L CSS Moduli Immagini Informazioniy Varies 5 Contornay Ridimensiona 9 Strumenti 2 Visualizza sorgente 7 IPERVOICE 2 0 i iii Introduction Site name Technica
160. ed to the IP network that powers it via PoE Main technical characteristics 2 clean contact relay outputs C NC NO 230 V 5A max resistive load 2 inputs for external control buttons Power supply PoE 48 V nominal Current consumption 50 mA Operating temperature range 20 80 C Dimensions 108 W x 142 H x 37 D mm Installation wall mounting or in flush mounting box 23 4 2 THE INTERNAL LEVEL THE IP RISER COLUMNS IPervoice has been designed as IP based digital video door phone system so besides the system riser that forms the External level also the building riser structure can follow the same principle This is not the only option as described below the Internal level can be realized with the dedicated IPervoice CAT5 bus Figure 4 e Figure 5 show two typical IP riser structures In the first one in the riser base there is an Ethernet switch where the risers for the floors start branches to apartments are made by switches with PoE ports as for example the model 1039 45 PoE ports are necessary to provide power supply to iModo video door phone terminal installed in apartments Internal wiring IP riser network Legend mms P Network External wiring Switch 2 4 PoE Ports P Network Internal wiring 1039 45 7 m O To IP apartments To IP apartments BE o E 3 ee decry i fi i To IP apartments agaaga MMT T Min n f l
161. ed to the input of the same special decoder allows to turn the light on For the configuration of events able to activate special decoder 1039 80 outputs see IP call modules advanced configuration on page 104 Concierge Switchboard on page 109 IP key reader on page 111 and Apartment Configuration on page 149 146 Name WB MC Light Number Time 0 0 means bistable Event List Button z Event Type SAKAY Event sender sender name Confirm Cancel Figure 98 Advanced Configuration Special Decoder outputs configuration Name Output identifier required alphanumeric field Maximum length 32 characters W Note itis suggested to assign an identifier to each output which must contain the reference to the belonging module for an easier identification during the procedure used to associate it to the command event For example to define the name of an output used to switch a light of the special decoder West Block Main corridor its identifier could be WB MC Light1 Number Output number Read only field Allowed values 0 1 Time Pulse length of the relay output Each output is independent so it is possible to assign different values for each of them min 0 sec max 999 sec Default value O in this case the output operates in bistable mode 147 Per VOICE EVENT OUTPUT ASSOCIATION The procedure used to associate an output to an event used to control the output statu
162. ed with a 4 3 LCD The user interface is simple and user friendly Soft touch capacitance button are used for access The device implements various other functions in addition to traditional video door phone features The most important are e Address book containing up to 32 users e Intercom call to any user of the same column e Intercom call to any apartment door phones using intercom interface 1039 36 e Call to any of the switchboards 1039 41 or VolP telephones 4501 5 present in the system e Activating commands for any special decoder 1039 80 present on the IP network The AIKO hands free video door phone requires firmware version 3 0 or higher on 4 user decoder 1039 34 FOLIO hands free video door phone 1706 7 black 1706 8 white FOLIO is a colour video door phone Two versions are available white 1706 8 and black 1706 7 It has a 3 5 LCD allowing installation with minimal protrusion from the wall The user interface is simple and user friendly Backlit soft touch capacitance button are used for access The device implements various other functions in addition to traditional video door phone features The most important are e Address book containing up to 32 users e Intercom call to any user of the same column e Intercom call to any apartment door phones using intercom interface 1039 36 e Call to any of the switchboards 1039 41 or VolP telephones 4501 5 present in the system e Activating comma
163. emazsodenndbasverceeienetadevecciecese ace e EE 275 1341 5 Search Dy Key Code Badoe COGC sasiu E a A 275 13116 SearchIMNMUR Ste ModE soii E E tea caesiausncntateer es 276 Stand Alone FrontEnd Usage IPervoice Sa fe ccccccsscsccscesceccccccccccescesceccecceccssesccecces 278 14 1 Hardware and Software Requirements cccccsccssccssccsceeeseucesuceseseuceeeseeeeeuseeeseuceeeeeueeeeseuseeuseeeenenes 279 LAD Prelnstaldation Checks UOC AES suck sam sausiaciccar ait aT E 280 LAsS JIPEMVOICE Sa TetlNSta lla ClO Msc caccetss tetanic ccanseaectutatetesun eea aeoiee entrar oneawtedesutesee 281 144 Post Installation Check cats oho nuh sahara samen cas ata tacit eect ac selene eitagaineas ga tyas de 281 T45 Statne EME Ap 0 lia CON cccassauatnuw nanannenntiaan taadaohaanbana A 283 14 5 1 Switching to Mobile Mode Local MOde cccccccccesscccesceceesseecesueecesseeecesseeecesseeeceesseeecessceeensssesensaeees 284 14 5 2 Back to Server Mode on line Mode rerne E 286 TAG TREM aE MENU neeaae E ert Rr ony rene Ene A er ncn eeOn sn meer ar er reeereeT reer emnrnet 287 t47 Application Structure and FUNCTIONS oneone A 287 14 8 Adding and Configuring New IP DeViCeS cccccccesccssccsccesseuceuceeeseuceeeseueseuseeueeuseueseuseeeseeeeuseseenenes 288 14 9 Column Devices Configuration using IPerVOiCe SA FC cccceccsscceecnceeuceseeeuceeuseuceeuseeueeeuseeeeuseeseanenes 290 14 9 1 Selecting the Device to be Configured and Transfe
164. enti 2 Visualizza sorgente 7 Opzioni IPERVOICE 1 00 Mozilla Firefox _ IPERVOICE 1 00 Steps introducing Site configuration Gateway Call module Entry panel Alarm interface The Startup Wizard is complete Switchboard Video server Lift interface Key reader Special decoder Voip phone End of wizard Images 1 1 Loaded 7KB Speed 14 83KB s Time 0473 Completato Fiddler OFF aut gt Figure 71 Startup Wizard End of configuration 122 Per VOICE 9 IPERVOICE DEVICES ADVANCED CONFIGURATION All the IPervoice devices have some advanced configuration parameters that must be explicitly set for the correct operation of the system This chapter describes these parameters showing for each device its meaning and programming mode 9 1 IP CATS GATEWAY Differently from other devices described later IP Gateways 1039 50 do not need any direct configuration of further parameters in order to operate correctly except if the second audio channel is installed in the building riser To add this feature access the configuration page by selecting the desired module from the devices tree as shown in Figure 72 x tha Technical Guide System we g Time Profiles O Access Profiles Da j H Se Primary call module an Name Gateway West Towed p Primary entry panel ofn Code 88 55 M Bock second audio E fa East Block chan
165. ephone 4501 5 The Domus VolPhone is an IP telephone based on SIP protocol for Voice over IP VoIP applications it is also provided with a PSTN port for the connection to the traditional telephone line Typical installations include common areas such as bars swimming pools porter s lodges and so on VolP ATA Interface 4501 30 The VoIP ATA interface allows to connect to Pervoice IP network a traditional analog telephone making it a IP SIP based telephone for Voice over IP VoIP applications The interface 4501 30 is also equipped with a PSTN port that can be used to connect it to a traditional telephone line 20 Main technical characteristics 4 coax video inputs for 1Vpp 75 Q analogue signals 4 alarm inputs associated to the cameras 1 RJ45 Ethernet port Power supply PoE 48 V nominal Current consumption in standby 45 mA 70 mA max Operating temperature range 10 50 C Dimensions 50 W x 149 H x 103 D mm Installation DIN rail Main technical characteristics 1 GHz Intel Pentium processor with 512 MByte RAM and 2 GByte Solid State Disk 1 RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to the IP network 4 USB ports ON OFF button and signalling led Embedded DHCP Server to automatically assign the IP addresses to the Ethernet devices Embedded configuration Power supply by means of a provided power supply unit in 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz out 12 Vdc 5 A Operating temperature range 20
166. er Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Door on page 213 Default value No time profile applied after changes have been performed press the button Confirm to automatically apply them to all the IPervoice servers configured in the Multi Site system If one or more sites are disconnected this state is shown by a red icon in the devices tree save operations will not be possible This because servers data would not be coherent inside the system If it is needed to operate also in such specific requirements the disconnected site must be suspended from its normal operation as described in paragraph Server Configuration in Multi Site Mode on page 240 223 Per VOICE 12 4 EXTERNAL PERSON GROUPS IPervoice system can manage the controlled access to the building also for externals maintenance men suppliers etc For an accurate access management it is possible to define one or more groups each one composed by respective users According to requirements these groups can be specific for firms service areas etc In order to define groups access to the devices tree and select the item External person groups as shown in Figure 181 if the system is configured in standard mode or as shown in Figure 182 on page 225 in Multi Site mode il t Technical Guide System ER w Time Profile Access GS Access Profiles call Door Profiles Group ID Group name 0 H S Primary call modu
167. er The value is selected from the pull down menu W Warning Each apartment must always have an apartment station with identification number 0 this is the Master door phone used by the system for automatic diagnostic operations Type Apartment station type The selection is made from a pull down menu the available values are e Audio door phone Door phone audio only e Video door phone Video door phone audio and video e Hands free Video door phone Hands free Hands free audio and video Default value Video door phone Room monitor enabled Room monitor enabling Available values Yes No Default value No Topological Code Topological code assigned by the system it cannot be changed by the user W Note The last two digits are obtained by the apartment station identification number from 0O up to 15 Device status Device status detected by the system The status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Table 50 Apartment stations configuration Meaning of configuration data gt if enabled this function allows the concierge switchboard in case of an alarm coming from the apartment to activate on the apartment station a mono directional audio link in order to listen what is happening in that apartment 205 Per VOICE 11 6 INTERCOM INTERFACE CONFIGURATION If four stations per apartment are not enough to meet system requirements IPervoice allows to extend this limit up to a max of s
168. er decoder 1039 34 4 inputs are available used for the floor call function for the four apartments When a visitor presses the doorbell button outside the apartment connected to the related floor call input the apartment station emits the dedicated ring tonet 5 2 THE SWITCHBOARD SERVICE In the IPervoice system the service that makes it possible to manage the Concierge Switchboard is performed by a software application called Switchboard developed for Windows Vista and Windows 71t operating systems Figure 16 BIStF1W1 B1S1F1W1 ormel IS IN YOUR LIFE Figure 16 Switchboard application The floor call does not change the audio channel state which remains inthe same condition as before the call 11 Windows Vista Home Premium version Windows 7 Home Premium Professional e Ultimate version 51 Per VOICE IPervoice is unlimited regarding the number of switchboards that can be present in the system so if required by operative requirements the concierge service can be distributed to more units according to competence areas The personal computer minimum requirements are described in the product list at page 19 for the configuration of the optional devices two solutions are available The first one described in Figure 17 uses the provided USB door phone the second one described in Figure 18 uses a traditional handset composed by headset and embedded microphone In both cases a common webcam is a
169. er effettuare le conmessioni Normaimente Java utilizza be impostamon direte del browser Web La modifica d Use scrip di configurazions automatics proxy queste impostagion destinata al sol utenti avanzati or r Airo Pe rir F iOa SEVE poy per Nann DA parong ampi Fie temporanea Internet I fe utrzati nele app cazioni Java vengono memorizzat in una spadale cartela per una successiva esecuzione pii rapida La modfica di queste impostazioni o eiminazione dei fle sono destnate sol utent avanzat Impostazioni file tem ie 1 aj Elimina file temporanei A Eiminare sequent fle temooranei Bppicazion e applet File tracca e registro aa __ Figure 155 Java configuration Network settings and temporary files Double click with the mouse to see the control panel where two operations must be performed gt Checking network settings gt Deleting Internet temporary files The first operation can be performed once and its purpose is to check that Java environment uses the same network settings as those used by the Internet Browser as shown in the upper side of Figure 155 after pressing the button Network settings check that the item Use Browser settings is selected and then press OK 201 Per VOICE The second operation must be performed each time the IPervoice server is updated after pressing the button Settings and Delete file a dialog
170. er of 250 specific for Modo and iModo Touch models 153 Per VOICE Defau images Y Call buttons Call button Not assigned Switchboard SWB Specific switchboards Concierge risa Competence area switchboards Not assigned Outputs F Output List _ WB MC Light1 ON OFF TOGGLE WB MC Light2 JON OFF TOGGLE VoIP Phone Swimming Apartment Topological code B1 Confirm Cancel Figure 104 Stair advanced configuration Preset call buttons Programming information are in Table 45 Call Buttons The system executes the command configured below when the call button selected from the pull down menu is pressed Available values are from Call button 1 to Call button 250 These are configurable buttons used when the apartment station handset is picked u or the conversation button on hands free models has been pressed Not assigned Default condition when the button is pressed the system doesn t send any command Switchboard This command is used to call a switchboard or activate outputs of a special decoder For switchboards there are three different choices gt Specific Switchboard select from the pull down menu the switchboard to which the call must be sent gt All Switchboards The call is sent to all switchboards gt Competence area switchboards The call is sent only to switchboards which have competence in the apartment For information about button on
171. er supply unit ui 1039 20 Figure 25 Internal level riser topology and distances The main rules to be respected that are always valid are the following gt The max extension of a riser except derived stations inside apartments must not be greater than 900 m 67 Per VOICE gt Onthe riser the max distance between a power supply 1039 20 and the next one must be shorter or equal to 100 m The max number of power supply units that can be installed in a riser is 9 The max number of 4 user decoders 1039 34 that can be installed between a power supply and the next one i e for each segment is 30 so the max number of decoders allowed in each riser is 270 gt Each power supply unit can power 30 decoders and 120 apartment stations so this is the max number of apartment stations that can be installed in each segment Notes concerning segment dimensioning If only one apartment station can be connected to each derived branch the max segment extension will be composed by 30 decoders and 120 Apartment Stations AS 120 AS 4 30 If 2 video door phone apartment stations are connected to each derived branch i e for each apartment the max number of decoders that can be installed will be 120 2 4 15 In brief the main constraint depends on the apartment station number that cannot be higher than 120 if the number of AS needed for each apartment is known it is possible to define the n
172. erminal 1717 2 does not need any local power supply because this is provided by PoE means directly of Pervoice IP network 32 Per VOICE 4 5 THE INTERNAL LEVEL THE DISTRIBUTION IN TRADITIONAL APARTMENTS If the traditional CAT5 dedicated solution has been chosen Pervoice offers two options for installing devices inside an apartment In the first case as shown in the upper area of Figure 10 each device is connected in series to the next one starting from the 4 user decoder When the intercom function is not required inside the apartments a configuration with up to four branches of derived bus can be used lf more than four derived bus lines must be installed or the intercom function is required the wiring configuration must be the same as shown in the lower area of Figure 10 In this case up to four derived buses are connected to an intercom interface 1039 36 which through a column power supply unit 1039 20 is connected to the respective 4 user decoder If required up to 4 interfaces 1039 36 can be installed allowing each apartment to have up to 16 derived buses It is important to note that an intercom conversation between two derived buses does not use the building riser column max 4 devices i 0 i E D Out BUS MODO touch screen monitor SIGNO Video doorphone 1717 1 1740 40 a onl To others Four user decoder 1039 34 Fourth apartment IMAGO Video doorphone Po
173. erved for Urmet technical personnel Do not use lperview The check box allows to enable integration with Urmet iPerView control graphic system Default value not selected 236 Date amp Time Timing Zone Date amp Time Automatic Daylight Saving time Date amp Time Daylight Saving time status Date amp Time Server date amp time IP Settings IP address IP Settings Subnet mask IP Settings Default router IP Settings DNS server DHCP Mode W Warning carefully i Er VOICE It can be selected from the pull down menu and allows to set the correct time zone of the server measured from Greenwich time The check box allows to switch automatically from daylight saving time and vice versa Default value not selected If the previous option has been selected it indicates if the system is using the daylight saving time The two text boxes allow to set server date and time W Warning to enter the date pay attention to the format as described by the text box label IPervoice server IP address Default value 192 168 1 1 Net mask used in Pervoice IP network Default value 255 255 0 0 Router IP address used by Pervoice server to access Internet Default value none DNS server IP address for names resolution used only by Pervoice server to access Internet Default value none DHCP server operating mode for IPervoice system IP addresses assignment values
174. es 187 Per VOICE 11 3 4 CALL BUTTONS On the apartment stations there are some configurable buttons seven max that can send commands outside the apartment They are mostly used when the apartment station handset is off hook or the conversation button has been pressed in hands free models to call a switchboard to call another apartment in the same riser column managed by the same IP gateway or to call a VoIP telephone Figure 140 Call button 1 Not assigned Switchboard SWB ecific switchboard VoIP Phone Apartment Topological code amp Figure 140 Apartment advanced configuration Call buttons The Table 45 contains the programming indications Call Buttons The system executes the command configured as described below when the same call button selected from the pull down menu is pressed The available values are Call button 1 to Call button 7 These are configurable buttons they are active if pressed when the apartment station handset is off hook or the conversation button has been pressed in hands free models Not assigned Default condition when the button is pressed the system does not execute any command Switchboard The command is used to call a switchboard or activate special decoder outputs Three options are available for switchboards gt Specific Switchboard From the pull down menu select the switchboard to be called gt All Switchboards The call is sent
175. es by IPervoice system 37 username root password test 114 Per VOICE Login VolP Enter your username and password to login VoIP server Username root Password eeee File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia Segnalibri Strumenti Aiuto gt SM 4 httpyaszses 2ag909oginege si ee oe A Le Pi visitati Come iniziare amp Ultime notizie l Disattiva 3 Cookie d CSS E Moduli lf Immagini Q Informazioni gt Varie 2 Contoma y Ridimensiona g Strumenti 5 Visualized _ VolP Web Management Ea System Information This page illustrate the system related information Model Name DomusVolPhone Firmware Version Thu Nov 13 16 24 22 2008 02ah Codec Version Wed Jun 11 13 30 10 2008 Others System Auth Save Change Update Reboot Images 8 8 Loaded 22KB Speed 5152KB s Time 0 427 Completato Fiddler OFF auto amp Figure 63 VoIP Telephone 4501 5 System information and main menu 115 Per VOICE PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS FOR VOIP ATA 4501 30 INTERFACE REGISTRATION To register 4501 30 interface perform the following operations Disconnect from the LAN network the PC used to configure the 4501 30 device Check that the PC is configured to operate in DHCP client mode H Propriet Connessione alla rete locale LAN Rete Condvisione Connetti tamte a Reatek RTLSI6SC P 8111C P Family PCI E Gigaba Eih Propriet Protocollo Internet
176. eseeeeeeeseeeesseeeeeess 39 5 IP ryvoice S rvicES esserci eee ee ee ee roe 41 Be WMS VIG SG DOr PRONE GENIC arose sciceec EE E E a 41 5 1 1 Services Functions ccscccccccasaselecrete ceaesseanivaxecsneateadeeetet veqneicscexeenesnos9aes saesdeneartbixianabeeeedteeresaessedeassvemeeeeenereeeeeseeds 43 De WMS SIC aC SSI E a N E EE E E T 51 521 SEVICE TUNTO INS serne a eE E aii E E 53 53 Panic service Raine Ala i LiiliciesaictnncunsuncieiandeaesadawiateannunanunnaadnnaTnimet T A 56 Ss ROOM MONTT SGI ICG siririn AEE EEE EEEE NEEE EAE ENTEL ERAN 57 S9 LocalActivations SEI VICE nacca oE EEEN TA OOA 58 IO MME Gi 8 BY est a 2 nie a E E a ae ee eee 59 Die iNEYACCESS CONE ON SCI ICO erii rosia a eE EEEE A A ANNEE OOE 61 SAk SPOOR KEV MaN pE MEM ranen ae E E tote aaeeieeaens 62 S2 MMEBINIS a T E N eee 62 Sho ANDS DI Eoee I nr eR S 63 58 TheTelephony Service VolPheccnsnennasrino ten ea aa E E tea 63 Technical PFESCEIDUIONS oair a A EEE 64 6 1 Prescriptions Tor External Levye bh ssonicnrion a a santa 64 6 2 Prescriptions torinternal VEVE lis x j cecuaiassanccatecaacohguatawn sani a a taehareheashoasbebes 66 HASCallaGION PFESEMIDUCIONS eenia a a a aranea 72 Pole Extemalileve i Street SIGS xicsuiateiaiahecaccaanaaanededect sans sentnne Sanctions hanehecunedsdadionusueuuasenta cet seahaantanaieieinaninannoies 72 Tii MNAIRII OVS PIAICU LOIN 3315p ees tase ct ece cece nace a S 73 T NNternaikevel RISCE SIGS ai cssauits cone cacaesnadeledal
177. evic t2 The figure shows the procedure to be used in case of Windows 7 operating system in case of another Windows operating system the procedure could be different 127 If the interface 1039 56 is replaced the identification procedure must be repeated It is suggested to use only one programming interface the operating system can t identify uniquely different units of the same type and the transfer could not work properly 292 Per VOICE 14 9 3 CHECKING CONFIGURATION DATA As already mentioned in paragraph Column Devices Programming Checking of parameters downloaded to the column device on page 170 the application confirms that configuration parameters have been transferred To check data sent to the device press the button Read from BT in the detail page of the selected column device The application will ask to connect to the Bluetooth interface using the same procedure previously described when read operation is completed a page will appear shown in Figure 266 2nd Audio channel Decoder number Ast no Code Alarm Master OP Button 4 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button Button 6 Button Pt ras os B ten taiton Aton a e y iton z a mo 1 at XXX Different value than that of current device Figure 266 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage System data reading via Bluetooth lf read information are different from Pervoice sa fe local database the user wil
178. figuration Apartment stations are considered to be devices included in the apartments to select the desired apartment stations identify in the devices tree the apartment that includes them and expand the item Door phone The system will display the list click on the desired apartment station in the column Number or Type to access to the modify page Figure 159 To add a new apartment station press the button Add a door phone under the title i 4 Technical Guide System H y Time Profiles o lt Primary call module H H Primary entry panel nl Blocks Ro East Block Ld nF Main Block o E nE west Block z West Stair S Secondary call module Secondary entry panel 2 Gateway EastTower D Decoder internace E Py Decoder El inarmati 4 Resident i AD Door phone GD op 0 Apartment _ __ Door phone list Add a door phone Number Type 0 Audio door phone Delete Figure 159 Apartment stations configuration Devices list 204 Per VOICE Apartment station configuration data is shown in Figure 160 their meaning in Table 50 G9 DP 0 Number 0 0 defined as Master door phone Type Audio door phone Room monitor enabled Yes No SIP address B2B1F1A100 Device status ALIVE Polling Confirm Cancel Figure 160 Apartment stations configuration configuration data Number Apartment station identification numb
179. figured and press the button Next to go to the detail page where the required configuration data must be entered The Table 26 describes the required data and its meaning Name Garage Access Reader IP address 192 168 2 7 MAC address 00 1E E0 00 10 C0 FW version 0 0 0 1 Device status ALIVE W Warning Name IP address MAC address FW version Device status Figure 59 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new IP key reader in order to activate the electrical lock of the passage to be controlled the Door must be added to the IP Key reader This operation must be manually performed as shown in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration IP Key Reader on page 144 Device identifier required field Maximum length 32 characters IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the key reader Device unique physical address Obtained to identify the devices in the configuration phase Application software version of the IP key reader Device status detected by the system the status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Table 26 IP Key reader identification data 112 Per VOICE 8 3 9 SPECIAL DECODER CONFIGURATION After configuring the IP key readers press the button Next to access the list of the new special decoders detected in the system Select from the list the devices to be configured and press the
180. for each riser column e 16 video door phone apartment stations for each apartment If the IP network is also used for riser columns no limits are imposed on the number of users by the system addressing capacity that is virtually unlimited Notice that when the number of user grows also the traffic volume managed by the IP network will increase So the IP network must be properly designed in order to ensure the features needed for the proper operation MULTI SITE MODE All the IP connected buildings compose the system managed by Pervoice system This one can reach considerable dimension in IPervoice documents this part of the system is called Site More than one Site must sometimes be managed in centralized mode keeping every single Site independent in order to ensure a high reliability level of the system IPervoice can also meet this requirement with Multi Site mode with these characteristics e High reliability level each Site is locally managed by its server and can operate fully independently e Absolute independence if connection among sites is lost each site keeps working properly e Centralized management the switchboards can manage all the Sites for which they are enabled and can send and receive calls from any device receive alarms checks doors and so on e Extended features the management of a distributed system needs that some functions as event log and user search and management work coherently and are aligned a
181. g from User Rights with less restrictions User Password User Rights Characteristics sysadmin yourevip System Administrator Whole system control Installer dacirrye Installer User enabled to installation and configuration O f SiteManager No predefined user Dedicated to system management Pp Maintenance No preset user Dedicated to maintenance service W Warning To change existing rights and users or create new ones access the FrontEnd with a user identity with System Administrator rights 12 8 2 SOFTWARE USER RIGHTS IPervoice defines five different user rights which cannot be deleted No new rights can be created but it is possible to rename the profile and change its rights The following figure and table show the page used to change Site Administrator and rights meaning e2 Site Administrator User rights name Site Administrator User rights configuration Configuration page Rights type Default configuration page Read only r install Wizard No rights x Menu Diagnostic No nghts x Menu Maintenance No nghts Bud Tree Site basic info Read and White Tree Resident Read and Write Tree Extemal Person Read and Write Apart Abscence Msg Read and Write Apart Logos Read and Write Call module Welcome message Read and Write New Device Management No rights v Custom flelds management No nights X Key Code Wizard Read and Write IP Address servers No nights E
182. gt the user is authorized to access to the main page wervoice 30 amp gt wisi e 39 Googie Pt DOD e E Enter your login sy aaceming Enter your password ETTET BH 0 Co A ne et immagine 6 5 Date 18 k Velocit 22 97 kBt Tempa 0 736 iun Figure 34 Login page of Pervoice Frontend 31 The PC used to connect to the FrontEnd must have the network interface configured for IP address automatic assignment otherwise the IPervoice server cannot be reached 32 It is suggested to use Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or greater or Mozilla Firefox 3 or greater Default username and password for a user with installer rights are installer and dacirrye Enter them in login and password fields and press the button Connect To access with different user name and password see paragraph Software Users Configuration on page 243 85 Per VOICE W Warning for the FrontEnd correct operation the browser must support javascript features that must be activated Also Cookies must be enabled The Frontend web page structure is split into three main areas see Figure 35 The first area indicated by number 1 is dedicated to the application menu where all the Frontend functions can be called the second area indicated in the figure by number 2 is on the left side of the page In this zone there is the functions tree related to the selected menu item or the list of system devices hierarchica
183. h decoder apartment Code of the apartment floor Required field that can be selected from the pull down menu 103 Apt Name Apt code Alarm Interface Number of Intercom Interfaces Number of Door Phones i Er VOICE Name of the apartment Required field The system assigns a default name like Apartmentn where n is a progressive number Code of the apartment Required numeric and unique field in the assigned floor Fixed length 2 alphanumeric characters e g 01 A1 1A AB Alarm interface 1039 61 installed in the apartment The value can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are none present Number of intercom interfaces 1039 36 installed in the apartment The value can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are O 1 2 3 4 W Warning If in the apartment there are more than one intercom interface a column power supply 1039 20 must be installed inside the apartment Number of door phones video door phones installed in the apartment The value can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are 0 1 2 3 4 W Warning lf there are two or more intercom interfaces for each of them the number of connected door phones video door phones must be defined Table 21 Apartment configuration data Once all required information has been entered by clicking the button Next page the Startup Wizard saves the data and goes to the next step W Warn
184. hd 0 4 r i i i 2 i ce 2 d v r Apartment4 3 DER4 Fil 04 Present 4 v i 3 2 v 3 vii SSR i ee eS ee e e a e a e a T me l E Decoder 2 none i i Li Decoder3 3 none Y pa Decoder4 none Y Figure 47 Startup Wizard Configuration of column devices associated to the gateway In order to configure the column devices enter the number of 4 user decoders This operation is performed by entering the decoder number in the respective text field named Number of connected Decoders and clicking the button Apply W Note The maximum number of decoders for each gateway is 270 Once this operation has been performed the system updates the page and displays the list of the requested decoders A For each element there are the following fields Dec Name Decoder name Required field The system assigns a default name like Decoder n where n is a progressive number Code Decoder code mandatory unique in its gateway domain It is a numeric identifier also in this case the system assigns a progressive default value Values between 1 and 270 Number of outputs connected to an apartment It defines the decoder output ports number to which the apartments are physically connected The value can be selected by a pull down menu the available values are none 1 2 3 4 Table 19 4 user decoder identification data 102 Per VOICE To expand the detail section of each 4 user decoder c
185. he Competence Area is defined and the re used to define the interactions with the IP special decoders 1039 80 Select in the devices tree the section Switchboard as indicated by the red arrow choose the switchboard to be configured and access the page shown in Figure 86 4 Technical Guide System z W Time Profiles BH S Primary call module Primary entry panel ile atocks E Fis in iorteus Name Concierge ED key readors Firstname special ects Topological code B2i Si Fil C1 a Switchboards E SIP Address B2S1F1C1 Concierge IP Address 192 168 2 6 Gr VolP phones RO Video servers RU External person groups _ ae Device status ALIVE Polling zones MAC Address 00 23 5A1E B8 62 FW Version 1 0 9 5 w a Confirm Reboot Cancel Figure 86 Advanced configuration Concierge switchboard 9 4 1 COMPETENCE AREA The competence area as described in the chapter Competence Areas on page 54 allows a logic group to be defined in which to add main and secondary call modules VolP telephones and also apartments These are now included in the switchboard competence area The selection can be performed by single selection only one apartment one VolP telephone and so on or by category groups all the main call modules or all the devices of a single stair or a building The section shown in Figure 87 is a useful example 138 Figure 8 7 Advanced configuration Manage
186. he auto on function the switchboard can at any time establish an audio video communication with a call module COMPETENCE AREAS For each switchboard a competence area can be defined in which can be added a group of call modules and or VoIP telephones logically combined with a group of apartment stations In this way the switchboard will have competence over the calls coming from the call modules or VoIP telephones addressed to an apartment station in the previously defined zone or also over the call coming from an apartment station included in the same zone The switchboard attendant can activate the concierge service and the management of the competence area by enabling the switchboard Day mode or can deactivate it by enabling the switchboard Night mode If a switchboard in Day mode receives a call that meets the competence requirements the call is not sent to the user but managed by the switchboard The attendant can speak to the visitor and decide to directly forward the call to the called user or act as an intermediary and speak to both of them By enabling the switchboard Night mode the attendant can also transfer its competence area to another switchboard the competence area will be returned to the first switchboard when it goes back in Day mode CONCIERGE SERVICE The switchboard can perform the concierge service in the three different modes as follows gt DAY gt NIGHT gt
187. he dedicated section after it has been expanded with the button gt placed beside Interface options Welcome Message Message shown in the calling call module LCD in the Welcome menu Welcome image import an image Browse Clear Concierge button 9 Yes No tenes oF Ot Audio Messages OFF E l m Infra red active 9 Yes No Camera Leds active D Yes No Figure 76 Advanced Configuration User interface options for the IP Call Module The section is split into two parts the first one is dedicated to the user interface customization the second one concerns the user interface operating settings The Table 30 describes all the information Default value Welcome Message Text message shown by the call module in the welcome display Max dimension 60 characters Image in png format Portable Network Graphics shown by the call module in the welcome display Image max size 110 x 170 pixel Concierge button Enabling the call to the competence area switchboard Yes PEED venation 42 To convert from other graphic formats as jpeg gif or bmp to png it is possible to use the application Paint provided with Windows operating systems or other similar utilities 127 Brightness Camera brightness it cannot be changed Theme Identifier of colour theme used by the user interface it 1 cannot be changed Micro Microphone audio level it cannot be changed Available values 5dB 3dB OdB 3dB
188. i _ 1 f I i _ f I i i oe i i i l i l i i l i l i i i l L 1 i i i i i i i i i i i _ lan Gateway Switch IP PoE 1039 50 1039 44 Switch IP PoE Gateway 1039 44 1039 50 1039 44 1039 50 ee 2 i Switch IP PoE Gateway i Max 100 m switch to switch distance max 100 m Switch IP PoE 1039 44 to other IP devices Bae a a ee Switch IP PoE Max 100m l Switch IP PoE 1039 44 Se 1039 44 to other IP devices IP System Server 1039 1 A Max 100 m Max 100 m z IP Reading Head IP Call Module Concierge Switchboard 1039 88 1039 14 1039 41 Figure 24 External level IP network topology and distances extension However as shown in the Figure 24 more Ethernet switches can be daisy chain connected in order to connect for example more buildings among them In this way long distances can be reached because from each switch output another 100m segment can start to reach another switch and so on It is recommended not to exceed the maximum number of 10 Ethernet switches daisy chain connected over the entire IP network For larger network configurations please contact the URMET Technical Service 65 Per VOICE 6 2 PRESCRIPTIONS FOR INTERNAL LEVEL As regards the Riser side devices are connected in series in each device there is one input and one output RJ45 socket the last one i
189. ian on page 169 lf the Bluetooth device is already paired with the PDA its name will appear in the pull down menu in the centre Figure 119 on the left press the button Connect Windows Mobile or select the item Conn Symbian to download data to the 4 user decoder if the operation has been successful in case of Windows Mobile device a popup window will be displayed with the message Write successfully on the right upper side of Figure 119 Displayed only in case of PDA SoftMobile application with Windows Mobile In case of Symbian PDA once the download phase is completed if no errors have occurred the application goes back to the page containing the list of 4 user decoders 167 Per VOICE f a Connect ka Er 0 53 Site Technical Guide System Block West Block B2 Stair West Stair S1 Search Device 1039 56 Programming Device Code 001 Connect Server a Connessione BT 1039 56 Programming Conn to 1039 56 Programming Device Status Check Device dbg0 cnt 6 dopo read n 6 abg Figure 119 SoftMobile Windows Mobile and Symbian versions Bluetooth device selection and data download The download procedure is now completed the Bluetooth programming interface 1039 56 can be disconnected repeat the same procedure to configure the next column device W Note if the programmed 4 user decoder manages apartments equipped with intercom interfaces 1039 36
190. iasuiendauacnnadnn aan beewies Candas aaaciculidadsddee da lasesaatunietacnbbioanaseravanets 74 PIA NVM OSS ETUC O INS e oct atatatasesse nse ant sagasaas mene tec e oase tat astatattececteesaie nye ajagcas aces mace ease hemes accet eect 75 7 Warning about RI4 5S Connectors USC resoni a a 76 TA Advices TOR GC GVICESANSTAIIALION earannan a a aa E a 77 7 4 1 Call Modules and Access Control Installation 0 ccccccssssessesssssssesssseeeeeeeeeeaeseaeeeeeesessessesssssssessassaaaes 77 ZAZ Apartment Stations Mstallatio Msc aiia 78 75 gt VIGO Signal AGIUSTIMEN batrsschsistsscadicaiioaatestiesdgedsosriesatodibi ident aaa a 79 7 6 Apartment Stations Configuration asiwwsissaiectisvudesiveduswinasnwanaranadsveuiainlaiebincsahsenktaeadeiiseans erase nen euadeanoans 80 TOL 2D SWARCACC OMI SUN UO N25 58 cas Paes esses cae lta had chara tase danse een esate asta hace eee 80 762 JBUULOM FUNCUIOM ASSOC ING io s8is ssc ce A cere ta cesses da taeda ac Dace rN 82 PELVOICE CONTIBUPAUION cicteesceaccucecotunisieceasososttoceasoessdpanausuadtceuetons ves onsesawacousveatessnene aa i 84 Sl GSRSralINTORMAUION lt 2cc5srscsens shai tn ter swisnsacsaanaeatesodemasntnesnepasnsessnetususe saxcuuseseannge onaaisunesesnoueeneneensnusncsuancu sent 84 82 HAMS FOU GS C rtaseriicteassste bd teahtahs E OA AEA E O O OEA potsaueaane 85 8 2 1 Frontend in Muli Ste Mode si1o2ce soe aes a ee 87 82 hemah Meninsuie er A ee eG RO ed ATA EP AL Rta eg ee 88 B2 DCV
191. ic characters e g B1 01 1B etc Table 17 Identification data of a new building Block By clicking the button Confirm the block is saved and a new stair can be added The procedure is the same by clicking the button Add a stair in the area New stair the required information can be entered The following Figure 46 and Table 18 show in detail the necessary data Gateway Code Block code B Add a block Stair code Add a stair Stair willbe added on current block New stair Name Left Stair Code S1 Confirm Cancel Figure 46 Startup Wizard Aggiunta di una Scala Stair 100 Per VOICE Name Stair identifier required field Maximum length 32 alphanumeric characters Code Stair code required field It must be unique for each block It is the second pair of characters for the topological call code Fixed length 2 alohanumeric characters for ex S1 01 1S etc Table 18 Identification data of a new Stair W Warning To add a new stair a block identified by the item Block code must be selected from the pull down list COLUMN DEVICES DEFINITION The third last phase needed to completely configure the gateway concerns the column devices that it manages The data to be entered concerns many aspects of the column structure W Warning Once saved all the data concerning the devices installed on the riser columns is not directly sent to the column devices The data will be tran
192. ically activated Figure 265 shows the procedure to be used in this situation the user will be informed that a new Bluetooth device has been detected and asked to confirm if this one can be added to the list If the answer is yes the user must enter the passkey 0000 then press the button Next to complete the identification procedure From this moment the interface 1039 56 is known by the host PC and the identification will not be requested any moret Immettere il codice di associazione per il dispositivo ll dispositivo stato aggiunto al computer Vera controllato che la connessione sia eseguita con il dispositive cometo good I codice visualizzato sul dispositive o disponibile tra le informazioni forte con il dispositivo Ein corso la venfica della disponibilit dei driver che verranno installati se necessario Per utilizzare il dispositive pu essere necessano attendere il completamente delf operazione Fer verificare se l installazione del dispositivo stata completata cercare il dispositio in Dispgsitii e stampanti 1033 56 Programming 1039 56 Programming pes Device Per proteggere il computer da accessi non autorizzati consentirne lindmiduanon solo quando si desidera che venga nlevato da un disposto Bluetooth Disattivare la funnonait di indniduazione quando non necessaria Device e 1039 56 identification Figure 265 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Bluetooth d
193. icated by number 1 of Figure 147 shows how to select devices and door types that can be used to enter in the building Notice that IP key readers if present cannot be selected because they are not equipped with a keypad Access profile Custom Access z V Used door code __ Used key code Door Code fi Time profile F Start validity 2071 05 17 08 02 CS F End validity 2012 05 17 08 02 Suspended j Cee ee ee i A fy a r N f Sa i e r Main Entrance Call Module Pedestral Vehicle entrance gatd West Entrance Call Module SY Keyreader Garage Access Reader Vehicle entrance gate Parking Access Reader Parking barrier Figure 147 Door Code configuration Data entry 87 if the door code is configured for opening both the passages managed by the call module pedestrian door and vehicle entrance once the code has been entered a message on the call module will ask the user to select the passage to be opened by entering 1 the first passage will be opened by entering 2 the second one will be opened 194 i Er VOICE The following table shows the meaning of the available fields Door Code Time Profile Start validity End validity Suspended Selected Door For Door Code Numeric door lock release code required field Minimum length 4 characters 8 characters max W Note to activate the hold up code enter
194. igned to the passage if available See chapter Time Bands on page 62 The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains other profiles previously programmed For information about time profiles definition refer to chapter Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Door on page 213 Default value No time profile applied Table 31 Advanced configuration Programming of IP call modules door 132 9 3 IP VIDEO DOOR UNIT ENTRY PANEL IP Video door units also called Entry Panel 1039 72 have the same functions as IP call modules previously described but they have no graphic display and numeric keyboard To access the configuration page select the desired module from the devices tree as shown in the following Figure 81 4 Technical Guide System pe E Time Profiles 8 O Access Profiles D S Primary call module a B Primary entry panel E Mz H al Blocks Cilp uin Ez a Key readers ri n i Special decoders E switchboards H IP Volf phones 5 D Video servers H i External person groups New device cS F Zones m pelP name F Basic infos Name pelP name SIP Address 00 1 60 01 15 C1 IP Address 192 168 2 12 MAC Address OOMEEO0 1 15 01 FW version 2 0 0 21 Device status ALIVE Figure 81 Confirm Per VOICE Advanced Configuration IP Video Door Unit 133 W Warning If operations concern a main module search for the desire
195. igured as required to open passages on call modules press on the telephone keypad the following buttons gt Pedestrian door opening O MainDoor Button 1 gt Vehicle entrance gate 1 Gate Button 2 W Warning the door opening command is sent by the VoIP telephone to the Call Module only during conversation with the Call Module 151 Per VOICE 9 9 STAIRS PRESET COMMANDS To make system configurations easier IPervoice allows to use some preset configurations which will be used by the system if there are no specific settings For each block and for each stair a preset profile can be assigned to some types of commands and behaviors In order to configure the apartment stations of the stair IPervoice will use the stair profile to automatically assign to the apartment stations the preset parameters So the installer doesn t need to configure them in manual mode Available commands are grouped into three sections the 1 one defines images shown on call modules for the block access the 2 is used to assign call buttons and the 3 for IP special decoders 1039 80 operations To access the page shown in Figure 91 select Blocks from the devices tree select the block as shown by the red arrow and then select the stair for which preset parameters must be configured F Technical Guide System ts i i W m a m Profiles Access Profiles e Primary call module Stair name West Stair Primary
196. ing The Startup Wizard does not require the type of each configured apartment station door phone video door phone hands free This information must be entered by changing the settings of each device as described in the chapter Apartment Stations Configuration on page 204 104 Per VOICE 8 3 4 IP CALL MODULE CONFIGURATION After configuring the IP CAT5 gateways the next Wizard step displays the list of detected Call Modules Figure 49 They are configured using the previously described procedures Figure 49 Startup Wizard List of new IP Call Modules Startup Wizard Configure a Name Main Entrance Call Module IP address 192 168 2 2 MAC address OO 1E E0 00 0B A9 FW version 0 4 2 6 Device status ALIVE Call Module type Primary x Figure 50 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new IP Call Module To configure Call Modules with the StartUp Wizard enter only the main data concerning identification and type This is the minimum required data for the configuration to obtain the correct operation the installer must complete the configuration by entering the other data as described in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration IP Call Module on page 124 Name Call Module identifier required field Max length 32 characters IP address IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the call module MAC address Device unique physical address Used to identify each
197. ions 125 W x 250 H x 13 D mm Installation in flush mounting box 1145 52 Protection degree IP42 IP Key Reader 1039 88 The key reader 1039 88 is used to read the proximity keys 1125 50 The device is equipped with a relay output able to control an electrical lock and also with an input available for a door lock release button exit switch Main technical characteristics 125kHz proximity key reader compatible with keys 1125 50 Management of electrical lock with a clean contact relay output C NC NO 30V 3 5A max Input for entrance hall button exit switch Input for open door contact Power supply PoE 48 V nominal Current consumption 100 mA Operating temperature range 20 80 C Dimensions 125 W x 125 H x 13 D mm Installation in flush mounting box 1145 51 or wall mounting with enclosure 1145 311 Protection degree IP42 18 Main technical characteristics Competence areas management to associate the switchboard to a specific group of users Call forwarding to another switchboard in case of operator absence Sending of audio messages for single user group of users and all users Management of intrusion panic and hold up alarms PC Concierge switchboard 1039 41 IPervoice system implements the concierge switchboard function using a Personal Computer and a specific software application The PC must be equipped with an audio card in order to perform audio communications with the
198. iot N13 Plot N14 Piot N15 7 Plot N26N W Plot N26S Figure 90 Multi Site mode Advanced Configuration Switchboard registration server offline Last Name FirstName Concierge 07 Topoiogicaicode BS x sw FS 87_ SIP Address BSSWFS87 IP Address 10 1 100 104 MAC Address BC AE C5 56 7A 81 FW Version 1 5 24 a Device status ALIVE Call divert none Lz V Athletes Village NO3 FW3 0 V Athletes Village NO7 FW3 0 V Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 Athletes Village N15 FW3 0 3 Plot NOt Plot N02 W Plot No3 Plot N04 Plot N09 7 Plot N10 Plot N13 V Plot n14 W Plot N15 W Plot N26N W Plot N265 Figure 91 Multi Site mode Advanced Configuration Switchboard registration 141 Per VOICE 9 4 5 COMPETENCE AREA E SPECIAL FUNCTIONS IN MULTI SITE MODE Competence areas and Special functions configuration in a Multi Site system is similar to the one above described paragraphs 9 4 1 e 9 4 2 and on page 138 and following before performing the desired configurations select the site Competence areas to which a switchboard belongs and special functions that it can manage are specific for each site and they must be configured in this site Figure 92 shows a typical example of both the features Wot assigned Outputs Dri tput on Special Cod Not assigned outputs SHY Figure 92 Multi Site mode Advanced Configuration Switchboard Competence Areas and Special Function
199. ip Switch Configuration on page 80 13 5 1 IP DEVICES REPLACEMENT For these devices the procedure is composed by the following steps 1 Installation of the new device instead of the old one 2 Automatic identification of the new device by the Pervoice server 3 Replacement with FrontEnd The first step concerns the physical replacement of the device included wiring operations The installer is not involved in the second step except for the VoIP telephone 4501 5 or VoIP ATA 4501 30 that need a preliminary operation in order to be identified by the server as new devices to be included in the system for further details see VolP Telephone Configuration on page 114 256 Per VOICE The third last step concerns the procedure to be performed with the Pervoice FrontEnd and allows to transfer the configuration from the old device to the new one just replaced W Note The following example will describe the procedure to be used with the FrontEnd assuming that a call module must be replaced Note that this procedure is the same as in case of replacement of other IP devices The list of new devices detected by the Pervoice server is displayed by the FrontEnd by selecting the item New device as shown in Figure 217 In the centre of the page there is the list of all the new IP devices identified by the server near each one there are information about device type IP address MAC address firmware version
200. is not possible to restore a configuration using a backup performed with a server version different from the current one It is suggested before each firmware upgrade to always perform a first backup to save system data and after updating perform a second one in order to have a backup performed with the updated version of the system If it is needed to restore a configuration using a backup performed with a server version different from the current one first of all restore the firmware version used to perform the backup and then restore configuration data 13 2 1 RESTORE OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DATA IN MULTI SITE MODE Even the restore operation in multi site mode introduces one more phase in order to specify on which sites restore the configuration data As shown in Figure 207 you can specify whether to perform a total restore on all sites or a partial restore selecting one or more sites 248 B Configuration backup and restore Restore all data from a previous backup F All sites C Plot 40 4 5 1 Plot 6 10 1 6 1 Plot 8 10 1 8 4 C Test 3 4 Server 4 10 1 11 1 Test 3 4 Server 2 10 1 12 1 Test 3 4 Server 3 10 1 13 1 Back to main page Next Figure 207 System maintenance System configuration restore of a multi site installation data selection Per VOICE At the end the user is notified about the operation result see Figure 206 to complete the procedure the last oper
201. ite system the selection of doors operated by door lock release code or proximity key must be repeated for all the concerned sites To perform this operation expand the detail section of each site see Figure 176 by clicking on the image beside the site name This section will show the available doors where access modes can be configured W Warning Code 5 Name Block A Residents Used door code Used key code Time profile B Timo proces F Startvatidity 2011 12 13 16 06 Start validity 2011 12 13 16 06 End validity 2012 12 13 16 06 E End validity 2012 12 13 16 06 a C T primary est modue a a CM Plot 1 E F Door Plot 1 Fi P Keyreader KR Plot NO1 Door ER Plot NOT Figure 176 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Access profile definition In Multi Site mode Access Profile data saving for a large number of users could last for several minutes because updated data must be sent to all the concerned users on all the related sites 218 Per VOICE 12 3 DOOR PROFILES The third and last profile category concerns doors used to access the building Two categories can be configured gt Door profiles for call modules gt Door profiles for IP key readers To access the door profiles list select from the devices tree the item Door Profiles as shown in Figure 177 if the system is in standard mode or as in Figure 178 if in Multi Site mode In the upper side
202. iver W Note John John Paul Figure 242 Utility functions Search by badge code The search by key code can also be performed in a guided mode with the Encoder 125 For further information see paragraph Automatic Key Code Wizard on page 198 275 Per VOICE 13 11 46 SEARCH IN MULTI SITE MODE When iPervoice is configured to operate in Multi Site mode the search page shows on the right the list of the sites where to perform search operations Figure 243 shows a typical example a Search Available sites Search by Person lastname All J Athletes Village NOI FW3 0 7 Alnietes Village NOT FW3 0 Athletes Village N10 FW3 0 Vi Ainletes Village NIS FW 3 0 vi Plot NO1 J Plot NO2 G4 Piot NOs search Jit Piot NO4 RF Piot NOS EA Phot N10 Fi Plot N13 F Plot 14 F Plot 15 7 Plot N26N J Plot N2658 Figure 243 Multi Site mode Utility functions Search The user can select one or more sites where to perform the search according to requirements Regardless of the search type the results will show the list of selected sites expand them to see retrieved data For instance the search by last name Security as name of an external present in more than one system site could provide a result as shown in Figure 244 the pre defined site is the one accessed by the FrontEnd in this case Plot NO1 276 Per VOICE EJ Searchby Person lastname
203. ixteen using intercom interfaces One to four intercom interfaces 1039 36 can be added for each apartment each interface allows to connect up to four apartment stations To add a new intercom interface first of all select the desired apartment from the devices list and click on Add intercom interface as shown in Figure 161 Name Topological code B2 1 1 F1 A2 Logic code Decoder port number 1 DER2 Figure 161 Intercom Interface Configuration Adding a new interface If an interface 1039 36 has already been added to the apartment in order to add other similar devices use the interfaces list as shown in Figure 162 Access to the same list to change or delete previously added interfaces E fle wes Block m E Wrest Siar E gt Secondary cal module ES s lat Secondary entry panel Hamre Humber intercom 0 Delete Sy ips West Tower a Mecoders p oA Decodert Apartment A Apartment 5 IRI Residents E O intercom interface a intercon Figure 162 Intercom Interface Configuration Intercom Interface List In both cases the user must enter the name and the number of the new device Figure 163 e la Table 51 describe meaning and allowed values of the parameters for this operation 206 Per VOICE Name Intercom Number 05 1 2 Confirm Cancel Figure 163 Intercom Interface Configuration Intercom Interface
204. l Access Service Position of controlled passages 61 Per VOICE The devices used and their functions are shown in the following Figure 22 ah e A IP System Server 1039 1 1039 14 bt IP Reading Head 1039 88 IP Call Modules l l l Figure 22 Control Access Service Used devices 5 7 1 PROXIMITY KEY MANAGEMENT A passage is opened only if the proximity reader embedded in the call module or stand alone identifies a valid key A key is valid and enabled to open a passage if its identification code is associated to a resident or an external person authorized to come into the building for example a maintenance man or a supplier the passages that can be opened must be specified for each key In this way the accesses can be individually managed for example allowing the service staff to come in only using a reserved entrance door 5 7 2 TIME BANDS IPervoice makes it possible to define one or more time bands to limit the access to the building For example the maintenance men must not be enabled to enter during the night weekends or holidays Three time profiles can be configured The management operations of keys and associated passages are performed using the web application available through the system server 62 Per VOICE Door Profile These profiles are used to define the time b
205. l Guide System Site configuration Basic data Advanced informations Gateway Address Language English 7 Cab modia Street Via Bologna Adressing Method Topologie codes Entry panel Hum 1880 Power cycle Postal code 10154 Door phone IP City Turin Call Pick up Time T1 seconds IP Alarm IF Province TO Guaranteed Conversation Time T2 call seconds Switchboard Agent Data Circular Log Buffer Size Video server Company name Agent name IP Lift interface Reset time 2500 seconds Unconditional Alarm Reset Tue False Phone Key reader Email Installer data Total Bandwidth for audio and video 100 Mb s Max number of concurrent audio video _ Company name calls 5 Special decoder Voip phone Pe Installer name Max number of concurrent audio only alls End of wizard Phone Email Previous page Back to main page Next page Completato Fiddler OFF auto pt Figure 41 Startup Wizard Configuration of system identification data Besides the site name which is compulsory to go on with the procedure the required data is split into two sections Basic and Advanced Information The first are optional but it is suggested to enter them for maintenance purposes this data concerns the system location and the business and technical reference The second makes it possible
206. l be informed and inconsistent parameters will be underlined in red Figure 267 shows a typical example 2nd Audio channel XXX Different value than that of current device Figure 267 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Highlighting of programming data differences 293
207. le o ai 1 Group01 Delete l e Primary entry panel a 2 Group02 Delete EF as Blocks ni EH ial P Lift TE E eal Key readers moo Special decoders fy Switchboards F k P VolP phones ia a gt Video servers E a Group g ed Group02 Figure 181 Advanced functions configuration List of external person group W Note The column ID Group contains the group code used to assign access profiles to externals during data import phase as described in chapter System Maintenance and Utility Functions Data Import on page 268 224 Per VOICE Ei Time Profile Access rs a7 Access Profiles 6 mal Door Profies E Jy Switchboards Group ID Group name Hal External person groups Soi eleta Ey a Groupi 2 Group0z Pelie E as Grouplz ry fs User custom fekis Lii oo E Fi Athletes Vilage H03 FWW3 0 ia ia l ot a Athletes Vilage NOT FW3 0 a ja Athletes Vilage N10 F30 Go 0 ao O Ea lt Sihletes Vilage NIS FW 3 0 E D fa o e Pilot HOI m2 Plott tt int NDZ Tl U ai Piot HOS Fu Fe iMi Figure 182 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration List of external person group To change an existing group click on the group name to create a new one press the button Add an external person group In the second case the procedure is composed by two steps first create the group then select this group and add the name of externals Figure 184 and
208. le 38 Stair advanced configuration Meaning of configuration parameters of preset special commands 4 The number of available special buttons depends on the station model used in the apartment in this case the max number is 250 specific for Modo and iModo Touch models 156 Per VOICE 10 COLUMN DEVICES CONFIGURATION The configuring operations performed with the StartUp Wizard described in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration on page 123 do not exhaust the subject of the devices belonging to IPervoice system riser columns In particular this chapter describes how to program the column devices by means of SmartPhone or Netbook how to configure the column lift interface 1039 37 and how to add new 4 user decoders 10 1 COLUMN DEVICES PROGRAMMING The operations concerning the configuration data download to column devices such as decoders 1039 34 intercom interfaces 1039 36 and lift interfaces 1039 37 must be performed on each device The system configuration data stored on the server and collected by the Frontend must be downloaded to a Mobile device The required data is sent to each single device by Bluetooth 1039 1 Gateway IP CATS Intercom Interface 1030 80 1039 36 Four user a T i co PS EEEF a ttti Lift Interface 1 39 34 pry ali 1039 37 A IP Call Module 1039 14 IP Network Installer Configuration B 5 Tia Notebook data Hel 2s Smar
209. les are flexible but not suitable for fixed installations Cables with solid copper conductors are normally used for installations in raceways or inside corrugated tubings WARNING 1039 90 and 1069 91 cables as the other commercial cables are cables with solid copper wires Modular connectors RJ45 Plug that are commonly on the market are suitable only for cable with stranded wire flexible and must not be used for cable with solid plain copper wire because they not ensure electric contact The use of male connectors RJ45 Plug for cable with stranded wire flexible on cables 1039 90 and 1069 91 or on other cables CAT5 with solid plain copper wire IS NOT ALLOWED and automatically voids system guarantee Urmet provides male connectors RJ45 Plug specially designed to be crimped on cable with solid plain copper wire These RJ45 Plugs have been tested and certified by Urmet they are suitable if properly used to ensure the correct operation of electric connection This plugs can be easily identified by the customer and Urmet technical service because they are silk printed with a non erasable mark URMET 1039 100 connectors and NOLAN 1039 101 connectors 76 Per VOICE 7 4 ADVICES FOR DEVICES INSTALLATION As already mentioned all devices must be correctly wired according to national standards in force Also the position of command modules as for example call modules and apartment stations is i
210. lick on the image near Dec Name The list of the outputs ports connected to the apartments will be displayed for the user To configure each apartment select the Floor to which it must be associated If the desired floor has not been added yet it is possible to add it during the apartment definition by pressing the button Add a floor As before the system will display the area where it can be added Name Code W Note New Floor Name Floor Code F1 Confirm Cancel Figure 48 Startup Wizard Floor adding Floor identifier required field Maximum length 32 alphanumeric characters Floor code required field It must be unique in the respective Block Stair codes It is the third pair of characters for the topological call code Fixed length 2 alohanumeric characters e g F1 01 1F etc Table 20 Identification data of a new floor the new floor will be added in the Block Stair assigned to the gateway during the configuration phase After adding the requested floors it is possible to enter information concerning the structure of each apartment C For each of them there are the following fields Port Floor Code The decoder port to which the apartment is connected It is an RJ45 socket called DER1 DER2 DER3 DER4 The value can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are O DER1 1 DER2 2 DER3 3 DERA4 W Warning The selected value must be different for eac
211. lly organized finally in the centre of the page indicated by number 3 the contents of the selected function or the device under configuration are displayed In login page shown in the figure the root element of zone 2 contains the site name the central area zone 3 shows the system basic information File Modifica Visualizza Cronologia Segnalibri Strumenti Aiuto Pg as q m pa Cc x iy http 192 268 1 PP MainFrarmetet phpiPHPSessib dle sacl be H edice eab j 4 qt pi amp Pi visitati Come iniziare qj Ultime notizie war G Cookies C55 C Module B Immagine Informazioni Lo Varies o Conternas gt e Ridimensiona Strumentis Vigualizza sorgente Opzioni XC C T LOG SEARCH SOFTWARE USER PFI UPGRADE SWATCH TO UPDATE REBOOT LOGOUT _ m p _ _ i erra i Technical Guide fyatem ry fe I E Time Profiles I 5 Cy Access Profiles name r AAS Site ethics Guide Suter a e na Primary entry panel p 7 E me B Am Bkk Hie adress j i Eile Lift moh a ae a a Cc Lr Ta z a py urn 1580 a ee 1 poese Dions i i tl switchboards id re K T 2 E jP WOP peor re J m fee E ED Video servers m Se Wi External parton groupe Agent data New device in Ampany hame Ba ee foes A e E E E Cc Figure 35 Frontend user interface 86 Per VOICE 8 2 1 FRONTEND IN MULTI
212. lows Resident External Imported name type Available values Resident External Required field Topo code Group ID Imported name identifier Available values Topo Code Group ID The first one is always associated to the Resident type and identifies the resident apartment the second one the External type and identifies the External person group where to add the name Required field Last Name Imported resident or external surname required field Max length 32 characters First Name First name of the resident or external to be imported required field Max length 32 characters Visibile Resident visibility if set to Yes the name last name and first name will be displayed on call modules Allowed values Yes No Default value if no specified Yes Phone number Telephone number associated to the resident Optional field Max length 16 numeric characters Forward phone number Not used For future purposes Door code Door lock release numeric code Min length 4 characters max 8 characters a Exported template is a csv comma separated values standard file Import process doesn t care about the file name if needed the file can be renamed The assignment must always be made using the apartment topological code even if the system addressing mode is Logical Code 109 110 266 Key code Proximity key identification code Required field in hexadecimal Fixed length 8 characters Access pr
213. lso used that must be compatible with Windows Vista in order to send also the video signal during the conversation a eS ES TE SNS a t i First Configuration WebCam USB Door phone USB and Audio Concierge Switchboard 1039 41 Figure 17 Concierge switchboard use of USB door phone 52 Per VOICE Second Configuration Handset Audio only Concierge Switchboard 1039 41 Figure 18 Concierge switchboard use of handset headset microphone 9 2 1 SERVICE FUNCTIONS CALLS TO THE SWITCHBOARD The concierge switchboard is identified by a topologic code or a logic code so it can be reached by the devices installed on the IP network such as call modules VoIP telephones and other switchboards or by the stations installed inside the apartments In case of IP devices the call is directly performed by entering the identifier code from the keypad or searching in the address directory If the call comes from an apartment station a call button must be configured to associate it to the selected switchboard This operation is performed by the installer via the configuration web frontend present on the IPervoice server 53 Per VOICE CALLS FROM THE SWITCHBOARD The switchboard can call any other system user a resident a VoIP telephone or also another switchboard The call is performed by entering the code or using the address directory that can be read by the switchboard software By using t
214. m the floors list the item Floors and then the apartment floor 4 Technical Guide System e v Time Profiles S Primary call module Ej Primary entry panel Resident name Resident First name Visible Fria Biocks H fle East Block gls FFleinsain Block ph E AE west Block hy we West Stair oo H Ss Secondary call module Secondary entry panel El S gt Gateway EastTower feg E AY Decoder interface a tet Decoderi Apartment z l Resident E GD Door phone E EE apartment H Fil iin interface l OB Floors Figure 142 Apartment configuration Adding a new resident Resident name Resident First name Visible John Brown Yes Delete Figure 143 Apartment configuration Residents list 191 Per VOICE Click on Add a resident under the title to gain access to the data entry page If some residents have already been added they will appear in the list as shown in Figure 143 Resident Last Name Brown Resident First Name John Visible o Yes No Phone number Forward phone number Accessiblity level E Access profile Custom Access Confirm Cancel Figure 144 Apartment configuration Entering the main data of a new resident Table 47 helps to understand the meaning of the main values to be entered click the button Confirm to add the new resident to the directory Name Firstname Visible Phone number Forward phone number
215. me apartment enter data of the first name then duplicate the row and change data for ex name and surname Key code etc When the editing phase is ended save the file and close it to proceed with import phase W Warning if a csv editor is used for file editing check that the editor doesn t change any data For ex the hexadecimal Key code field could contain zeroes These could appear not significant but if these data are considered as numeric values they could be deleted generating a code different from the original one The format is hexadecimal Letter case doesn t matter 112 The first row of the file must not be changed or deleted it is used by the system to describe the imported log file The a fields are separated by the character comma 267 Per VOICE 13 9 DATA IMPORT The import process is guided by a two steps Wizard To start the process select the item Import data in Maintenance menu In the displayed page the user can select the previously compiled file to be imported to the system Figure 231 sal Import data Figure 231 System Maintenance Data import file selection After this operation press the button Next to start the import process the user will be asked for a confirmation Do you confirm to start import data if resident or external exists it will be updated 7 No Figure 232 System Maintenance Data import import confirmation
216. me standard as for example some VoIP telephones However to ensure the system correct operation it is advisable to use only URMET certified devices t The IP network used by IPervoice must be private and isolated from other IP networks present in the building in order not to compromise the features and the proper operation of the system If it is necessary to have an Internet connection for software update or remote management this must be performed using a suitable modem router Voice Over Internet Protocol service mainly used for telephone communications through the Internet network Per VOICE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO VIDEO TRANSMISSION In IPervoice audio and video signals are digitally transmitted through the IP network This means that sounds and images are converted into numbers or digits before they are sent from one device to another To make the videos fluid enough the system must capture many images called frames in one second Typically 25 frames per second at least are needed to allow the human eye to observe images and perceive movements continuously and fluidly between one frame and the next one It is also necessary that the resolution of the captured images is good enough to obtain satisfactory detail All these features would require the transfer of a lot of data the digits on the IP network that would soon overwhelm its capacity to send more data at the same time 110010111001001001111100001 Call Module Con
217. ment of concierge switchboard competence areas 9 4 2 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Also the switchboard can activate one or more system outputs if an event occurs Not assigned Not assigned outputs oupittise Figure 88 Advanced configuration Special Decoder Functions that can be associated to the IP call module The outputs operating modes are the same as those indicated in the section concerning the call module but the special functions that can activate a command for the configured outputs are the following Drive output on call The system executes the command on the configured outputs when a video door phone call occurs Drive output on Special The system executes the command in case of a special code entered Code from the call module keypad 139 Per VOICE 9 4 3 SWITCHBOARD IN MULTI SITE MODE In Multi Site mode the switchboard configuration needs some additional steps in order to work properly The switchboard becomes the central control node of the whole Multi Site system because it can receive send information from to all IPervoice servers that it can manage In Multi Site mode the switchboards are in the first hierarchic level of the devices tree and over the single sites Figure 89 z Time Profile Access Eae j t 2 cy Access Profiles i Door Pro fies Switchboards hy Swi NOT Last Name First name IP Address MAC Address ar GWI NIS SWILNOT Concierge_0T 10 7 100 101 BC AE CS SETTA
218. mong the sites IPervoice Multi Site mode allows to extend these functions in order to manage them from a central unit 12 Per VOICE 4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE Observing the architecture of the IPervoice network it can be noted that the system is structured on two levels e The external level used to create the framework of the system The network used for communication between devices is fully P compatible e The internal level used to create the building riser columns and the respective apartments As already mentioned IPervoice allows to create this part of the system in two different modes gt Using an IP network with the same characteristics as the external level and separating logically one riser from another gt Using a CAT5 network In this case even if the same cable CAT5 and the same connectors RJ45 type is used to make wiring and installation operations easier the communication protocol is dedicated in order to obtain high performance at low price tO O ara i E a l Internal wiring Internal wiring mixed riser column CATS riser column Internal wiring IP riser column om on man ja 7 m mais ja om ot z Aam E Aman a Am LEET smar p DE im on ET S a 1m s ia n z Am imara is moe im Aman kas i L im im a ka Amn des 1m em pinni ha Em man Aman i LAL EE ee ss SS SS SS HS SS SS Se SS SS SS SE SS Se SS SS SS SS SS ES i E e E E E E M E E E
219. mounting box gt Insert the conductor into the wire guide respecting indicated colours EIA TIA 568B Standard 73 Per VOICE Cable Cable Colour oe Cable Colour No No Gren White Brown _ A Brown White Green White Brown Brown gt Cut the cables in order they stick out about 5mm from the wire guide insert the guide into the plug and crimp the plug using the suitable tool gt Verify that the grey sheath is inside the plug 7 2 INTERNAL LEVEL RISER SIDE The Internal level is the IPervoice network referred to building risers or apartments In this case cables are laid in ducts inside the structure in shaft for the riser and in pipes inside apartments or for floor distribution URMET 1069 91 blue cable also allows cables to be laid in ducts with 230V cables inside However it is suggested not to lay data wire with other 230V cables together for long distance in order to keep a high level of immunity to electromagnetic noise Other cables can be used only if they are CAT5 certified Warning standard CAT5 cable in the market can NOT be laid in ducts with other 230V cables inside The use of cables with characteristics different from the following is not allowed Main characteristics are described in Table 11 Or of a higher category as for example CAT5e 74 Per VOICE Cable type e Double sheathed cable with 4 unshielded twisted pairs UTP CAT 5E e External PVC sheath e Use
220. mportant for the correct operation especially for an easy use of IPervoice system 7 4 1 CALL MODULES AND ACCESS CONTROL INSTALLATION The Figure 28 shows the correct installation from the ground level of call modules and IP key reader 1039 14 1039 72 1039 88 1039 13 1 55 1 60 m 1 55 1 60 m 1 55 1 60 m 1 40 m 52 note i 1 40 m e note 1 35 m note i i I I l I I i i I I i Figure 28 Devices Installation Call modules and access control installation 1039 14 and 1039 13 devices are provided with special functions for helping disabled people wide angle lens specific audio repeater device for the hard of hearing simplified call If these features are required for correct installation refer to standards in force in the country where the system will be installed When these features are not required it is suggested to install the modules 1039 14 and 13 at a height of about 1 55 1 60 m as for the other devices shown in the figure 5 1 40 m 1039 14 and 1039 13 and 1 35 m 1039 88 from the floor is the measure to be respected according to Directive for disabled people for example in France these norms are included in Law 2005 102 of 11 02 2005 in Decree 2006 555 of 17 05 2006 and following amendments of 1 08 2006 26 02 2007 and 21 03 2007 77 Per VOICE 7 4 2 APARTMENT STATIONS INSTALLATION As regards installation of wall mounting door phones and video door
221. n i E aeri anet 7 Scence control Achei sence firma eetironce Epecunone dela maggao parte i Oo Ui riesta d conten Control ActiveX non firmat ndi Chedi confirmna A BS Disattwa Ativa modalit protetta richiede i rmi s ren Download bebo persona to mE aiem piai mar mttaer Tidebde un riavvio d Internet Explorer impostan personairraie Rempoa ai Phedio ate predehnita Remposid sn Figure 246 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Internet Explorer settings 118 W It depends on antivirus software in use See firewall instructions concerning configuration disabling procedures 12 Abbreviation of Active Extension Microsoft technology used to extend application functions 119 280 Per VOICE 14 3 IPERVOICE SA FE INSTALLATION To start the installation software execute the setup file in installation package The name of this file depends on the application version For example if the released version is 2 0 1 the name will be 2 0 1 37_ 1039 sa fe Build_073 10 exe Figure 247 is the typical window shown to the user Setup lperVoice SA FE fox es Welcome to the IperVoice SA FE Setup Wizard This will install IperVoice SA FE 2 0 1 37 on your computer t is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Nest to continue or Cancel to eat Setup Cance Figure 247 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Installation process splash screen During installation pha
222. n could be named VisioSoftMobile Windows Mobile or Client Midlet Symbian For details concerning the application installation on PDA refer to Appendix 2 The images show on the left the version for Windows Mobile on the right the version for Symbian Nokia Navigator 6110 162 i er VOICE j 2 VisioSoftMobile No Data r 0 00 ok w ClientMIDlet waiting Figure 113 System data download to column devices SoftMobile application start up In the upper side of the display appears the message No Data in Windows Mobile version or Site List in Symbian version to indicate that data included in the config dat file previously downloaded to the PDA is not yet available for the application The file must be selected because its download modes are different for the two operating systems both the examples will be described CONFIG DAT FILE SELECTION AND DOWNLOAD WINDOWS MOBILE Select the config dat file by clicking on the item MENU and then on Config as shown in the figure on the right The next step is shown in Figure 114 the user sees 2 Config the screen shown on the left side of the figure Press the button select to gain 7 3 READ FROM BT access to the page on the right side where the config dat file can be selected from 4 Search the list In the example the Pervoice file row is selected in the folder After selecting 7 the file the application goes back to the
223. n menu and must enter the last part of the real topological code Required field Fixed length 2 alphanumeric characters e g 01 A1 1A AB Logical Code Unique logic code for the apartment Available only if the system is configured in logic addressing mode Required field Length from 2 to 8 alohanumeric characters Decoder Port Number Apartment decoder port It is an RJ45 socket named DER1 DER2 DER3 DER4 The value can be selected form a pull down menu the available values are 0 DER1 1 DER2 2 DER3 3 DERA The FrontEnd only shows the ports not yet assigned Table 42 Adding an apartment Meaning of basic configuration data 184 Per VOICE 11 3 APARTMENT ADVANCED CONFIGURATION Even though the previously entered basic information is enough to make an apartment active it is possible to enter other configuration data concerning the following functions gt Floors that can be accessed by the residents of the specific apartment Floors accessible by the residents of the apartment Interaction with the call module n the calling call module Graphic maps of access paths Path Images Buttons used to call other devices Call buttons VV V WV Special functions Special functions 11 3 1 FLOORS ACCESSIBLE BY THE RESIDENTS OF THE APARTMENT This section that is shown expanded in Figure 137 makes it possible to select the floors to which the apartment residents can access This function is related to
224. n order to associate relays to floors it is necessary to configure the floor parameters to do this select from the devices list the desired floor identify the interface to be configured and select the relays to be activated This operation must be repeated for each floor to be managed Figure 133 shows for example the activation of the relay LIFT RELAY 1 if the lift must be enabled for Floor 1 Cron Name Floor Figure 133 Lift Interface Configuration Command relay association 7S It is possible to activate more than one relay for each floor in order to perform complex selections if needed by the lift control unit for example if a several digits binary code must be used Each lift interface operates only on its block stair so select only floors of the right block and stair 179 Per VOICE PARTICULAR CASES If several lifts serve a floor with more than one apartment and a single lift gives access to a specific apartment it is possible to limit the access to the single apartment using two lift interfaces For example on floor F12 there are apartments A12 and B12 only the lift 1 gives access to apartment A12 and only the lift 2 to apartment B12 In order that the interface L1 can correctly activate the lift 1 and L2 the lift 2 first of all it is necessary to assign apartments A12 and B12 to two different floors F12A and F12B and then associate the L1 interface relays to the floor F12A and
225. n page 160 The programming procedure of the 4 user decoder with the Bluetooth interface is described in the paragraph Download of system data to column devices on page 162 The last step concerns the checking of system data downloaded to the replaced device This operation is described in the paragraph Checking of parameters downloaded to the column device on page 170 13 6 ADDING NEW DEVICES As in the previous case the operation for adding devices is different according to device type IP or column devices The two procedures are the following gt IP devices The operation for adding a device and downloading the configuration is exclusively performed with the FrontEnd gt Column and apartment devices The operation for adding a device and setting configuration data is performed with the FrontEnd a Smartphone or a Netbook is used to download data The above described procedures are in brief the same used during the first phase of system configuration described in the following chapters 259 Per VOICE gt The StartUp Wizard on page 93 gt Pervoice Devices advanced Configuration on page 123 gt Column Devices Configuration on page 157 So instead of describing every single case two examples will be detailed one for IP devices and the other for column devices in order to highlight the differences between the two procedures In both cases the first step to add a new device is the but
226. n provide a maximum of four riser columns making installation in larger building more flexible W Warning the riser distributor allows the wiring of several riser columns instead of a single riser The maximum distance between one device and another and the logic characteristics that is the number of devices that the system can address in the column are the same with a single riser column 27 Main technical characteristics 2 x CATS RJ45 ports for the connection to the analogue riser BUS IN BUS OUT Button to activate video adjusting phase Input 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz Output 54 Vdc 0 6 A with electronic protection against overloads Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 180 W x 80 H x 90 D mm 10 DIN modules Installation DIN rail Main technical characteristics 1 x CAT5 RJ45 input port for the connection to the incoming riser column BUS IN 4 x CAT5 RJ45 output ports for the distribution of the outgoing riser columns OUT1 0UT4 Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption max 25 mA Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 108 W x 64 H x 90 D mm 6 DIN modules Installation DIN rail Column power supply unit for CATS 1039 20 The power supply unit 1039 20 is used to power the devices of the riser column and the apartment devices The power supply is directly injected on the communication BUS WX Warning to extend the CAT5 BUS up to the maximum
227. n to the SIP server also with the keypad For further information see the device user manual 118 Per VOICE If 4501 5 telephone is used after reboot this will perform the SIP registration to the 1039 1 server on the telephone the green led called REG will turn on to confirm the operation If using the 4501 30 interface after reboot caused by the save of the new settings the interface must be disconnected from the PC used for configuration and connected to IPervoice system with the WAN port present on the rear side of the interface Figure 68 Also in this case the green led REG on the device front panel will turn on to confirm the SIP registration LINE PHONE Ld LAN WAN POWER I Figure 68 VoIP ATA 450120 interface WAN connection for operation with IPervoice 119 Per VOICE CONFIGURATION WITH THE WIZARD Once the preliminary procedure is completed the StartUp Wizard shows the list of the new VolP telephones in a specific section select the devices to be configured and click the button Next page to access to the detail page where the required configuration data must be entered Firstname Pool O IP address 192 168 2 8 MAC address 00AEE0000S 2F FW version Device status POLL IN PROGRESS VoinPhonecode Blockade 60 gt Stair code S2 Addastair Stair will be added on current block Floor code Fi Addafioor Floor will be added on current block Voip Phone co
228. nagement Access profile management and Door profile management Group configuration for externals and User custom fields configuration 12 1 TIME PROFILES As already mentioned in the chapter The Access Control Service Time Bands on page 62 IPervoice system allows to define one or more time bands to limit the access to the building The main purpose is to perform a centralized management of time bands in this way if required the desired profile can be easily selected instead of manually configured There are three profile categories as shown in Table 54 Door profile These profiles are used to define the time band within which a door i e a passage can be opened Several time bands can be defined for each profile for ex morning afternoon and evening Each profile is week based so different operating modes can be configured for each day These profiles can be assigned to one or more doors present in the building Access profile The user can define these profiles as the previous ones they will be applied to door lock release codes proximity keys or both Holiday profile These settings also used in the previous profiles allow to define special dates with particular time profiles Table 54 Advanced functions configuration Time profiles 211 Per VOICe To access time profile management select from the devices tree the item Time Profile Access The FrontEnd will open a page shown in Figure 168 in standard m
229. nd reduce installation time The whole system both in riser columns and in apartments uses a CAT5 cable Also in this case Urmet provides a specific cable with a blue sheath 1069 91 suitable for laying it in ducts with 230V cables inside The flexibility of IPervoice is unlimited regarding the number of riser columns in a system so it is possible to make installations with a large number of users On the riser column a second audio channel can be present by adding a twisted pair cable e g another CAT5 cable anne a icar Lift Interf Internal wiring CAT5 riser column 050 571 t3 ky Legend os f Network CATS riser column 2nd audio channel Four user distributor 1039 34 n To iaa apa rtme nts i t vA Ai 8 i i F 11 cond i T To apartments lt i i aad i lll To apartments i M f J i s S p i i a Gateway IP CAT5 1039 50 Power supply unit 1039 20 w TET To apartments mininin ninin fn Ti ma f fi Figure 6 The internal level the dedicated CAT5 riser columns 26 max 4 risers tAr jas Riser distributor ue 1039 54 Gateway IP CATS Power supply unit 1039 50 niet Figure 7 The internal level distribution on multiple CAT5 risers With the riser distributor 1039 54 it is possible to install more than one riser column for the apartments The 103954 ca
230. nds for any special decoder 1039 80 present on the IP network The FOLIO hands free video door phone requires firmware version 3 0 or higher on 4 user decoder 1039 34 34 Main technical characteristics 2 x CATS RJ45 ports for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption in standby 1 mA 200 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 218 W x 123 H x 38 D mm Installation wall mounting with bracket 1707 95 or flush mounting with kit 1707 60 Main technical characteristics 7 TFT colour graphic display with advanced Graphical User Interface GUI Resolution 480H x 234V RGB dot Horizontal viewing angle 60 60 Vertical viewing angle 60 60 2 x CAT5 RJ45 ports for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption in standby 40 mA 130 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 225 W x 134 H x 36 D mm Installation 1717 95 wall mounting with bracket IMAGO hands free video door phone 1707 1 The device 1701 1 is a colour hands free video door phone with 4 display IMAGO can manage not only the functions of a standard video door phone system call audio and door opening but also other additional services provided by Pervoice system such as differentiated floor call signalling of entrance door opened or
231. nel available Yes Ne n l Main Block SIP address B251 g NSl west Biock IP address 192 166 24 ra t a ot hi Ne MAC address 00 4E 0 00 0C 4C E e Seconda ain Version 2 0 0 24 y ondary eniry panel Gateway Wesi Tower ai PAINE Polling Rat Py Decoders Command Execute Lift interface i 3 Fioors n Common Devices Confirm Reboot Cancel IP Litt i l Figure 72 Advanced Configuration IP CAT5 Gateway The presence absence condition of the second audio channel is defined by the setting of the option near Second channel available Select the desired option press the button Confirm to save the change Remember that as described in the paragraph Audio channel management on the riser column Choice methods on page 47 in order to make the second audio channel available a telephone pair must be installed on the riser or use one of the CAT5 cable pairs from the IP CAT5 column gateway to the first 4 user decoder The pair starts from this decoder and connects the next decoder and so on W Warning the change of this parameter requires to program again via Bluetooth all 4 user decoders 1039 34 present on that riser column 123 Per VOICE 9 2 IP CALL MODULE IP call modules such as 1039 13 or 1039 14 have a large number of parameters that can be changed by the installer To access to the parameters configuration page select the desired module in the devices tree Figure 73 W Warning ifth
232. nfiguration parameters it can be useful to check the data already downloaded to the device To perform this operation click on the item MENU if Windows Mobile PDA is used or on the item Options for Symbian PDA In both cases after this operation select the item READ FROM BT The application will require connection to the Bluetooth interface using the previously described modes After reading a page will be displayed as shown in Figure 122 2 Decoder_Config amp q 18 10 fk w Decoder config Site Technical Guide System Block West Block Stair West Stair Site Technical Guide System Decoder IF Decoder1 Block West Block Stair West Stair Pi Dec Decoder1 BLOCK STAIR NUM Eo E 1 om Block Stair Num i kon Figure 122 SoftMobile Windows Mobile and Symbian versions 4 user decoder parameters reading Mnemonic names used in the FrontEnd are not downloaded to column devices in the example Decoder1 so the PDA will read this name from its database and show the data to the user It follows that the name cannot be used to check if data has been downloaded to the right device The checking 170 Per VOICE must be performed for the 4 user decoder comparing the number assigned to the device regarding an apartment using its special parameters for example those highlighted in i e the lower part of topological code Floor and Apt and the call codes assigned to the a
233. ng holidays to time bands 12 1 2 TIME PROFILE ACCESS The management of time profiles for door lock release codes and proximity keys is the same as door profile management described before For programming refer to paragraph 12 1 1 214 12 1 3 HOLIDAYS Per VOICE Entering holidays allows to define special dates as for example the 25th December or a specific period changing the week profile used for Door and Access Profiles Figure 172 shows the configuration page the following table describes field meaning and entering modes Name Feast of the assumption Repeat every year Start Date 2011 08 15 maw Start Time 00 00 00 HH mem ss End Date 2011 08 15 qvvv aw op End Time 23 59 59 HH mm ss Confirm Cancel Figure 172 Advanced functions configuration Holidays programming Name Profile name Required field Max length 32 characters Repeat every year Start Date Start Time End Date End Time If selected it means that the holiday is recurring Default value Not selected Holiday start date and start time Required field Default value Date today s date Time 00 00 00 Holiday end date and end time Required field Default value Date today s date Time 23 59 59 W Multi Site after changes have been performed press the button Confirm to automatically apply them to all IPervoice servers configured in the Multi Site system If one or more sites are disconnected this state is sho
234. ng the Device Type but first of all the MAC Address that is the unique identifier of each IP device Press the button Configure near the IP key reader to be added and access to data entry page This page contains as shown in Figure 222 the data already described in Table 26 on page 112 the chapter about the Startup Wizard To execute the operation press the button Add Device Name IP address 192 168 2 7 MAC address 00 1E E0 00 10 C0 FW version 0 0 0 1 Device status UNKNOWN Add Device Back to New device Figure 222 System maintenance Entry of IP key reader data W Note The status of all the new IP devices in the list New Device remains UNKNOWN until the device is added to the system and configured 261 Per VOICE 13 6 2 ADDING NEW IP DEVICES USING THEIR MAC ADDRESS IPervoice FrontEnd allows to add new devices also by MAC address This mode is the only that can be used if DHCP module has been configured in Blocked mode see paragraph 12 7 Server Configuration on page 236 and following and allows to achieve the operation by entering the device type and its MAC address To use this feature click on the button Add new device near the summary page title New Device New Device Detect new devices Add new devices Device Type IP address Mac address FW version Device status Device Type Soft Touch Call Module 1039 13 Mac address 00 1E E0 00 21 C3
235. niry panel i Wiggs i G Gateway Wiest Tower E amp Fiora amp Fear F reer m H F oori M E Saag e Be A Residents Se AD oor phone ile i OP yop phones ts amp F Roof Floor OF u a Dica Devices a Ole ip vir E Z Key readers E special decoders jagsa E H Switchboards vis fa GP yop hanes F Agariment Ag Pettis Figure 166 IP apartments configuration Selection of belonging floor To add an apartment to the selected floor press the button Add IP apartment under the title The FrontEnd shows the page used to enter data composed by six sections The first one Basic Infos allows to enter the data needed by Pervoice to add the apartment in the system La Figure 167 and Table 53 show configuration data to be entered by the user and their meaning W Note Except for installation and configuration modes of devices inside an IP apartment which have the same functions as a video door phone for example iModo 1717 2 terminal or VoIP telephone 4501 5 other functions of resident access code management and residents address book update are managed like CAT5 dedicated network apartments procedures See paragraphs 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 of this chapter Information about Apartment advanced configuration are in paragraphs 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 3 4 and 11 3 5 209 Name IP Apartmeni5 Topological code B2 s1 F5 A tons Call button 1 ix Figure 167 IP apartment configu
236. nnel 1 Uninterruptible Channel 2 Channel 2 Table 6 Choice method in case of door phone call 48 Per VOICE MANAGEMENT OF CALL MODULE LOCKS AND DOOR LOCK RELEASE CODES The call modules 1039 13 and 1039 14 have two separate lock outputs The first output can be used to directly activate a fail locked type electric release The second output is via a relay contact and can be used to control for example an automatic gate or barrier On the call modules two door lock release modes are available Free In this case by pressing the door lock release button on the apartment station all the doors of the associated call modules are opened even if there are no calls in progress with that apartment station W Note ifthe call module is a secondary one the door is opened only if the command comes from an apartment station of the same riser but the main call modules always open the door Secret The door lock release function can only be activated by the apartment station which has received a call only the door managed by the call module from which the call comes will be opened W Note _ this is the default and suggested system configuration W Warning in installations with main and secondary call modules or if there is more than one main call module the main modules door lock release function must be configured in secret mode The opening of the call module door can also be performed by a door lock release numeri
237. nominal Current consumption 80 mA min 120 mA max Connection for local power supply if needed Operating temperature range 10 to 50 C Dimensions 130 W x 310 H x 15 D mm wall protrusion Installation in plastic flush mounting box 1145 53 Protection degree IP42 for user ELEKTA IP Call Module 1039 13 The call module 1039 13 is characterized by a special front panel made of smoked glass All the buttons are soft touch and there are no movable mechanical elements It can independently manage two different outputs the first one used to open a pedestrian door both with capacitive discharge and with relay contacts the second to control for example an automatic gate or barrier The call module has an embedded proximity key reader for access control It is equipped with a colour camera with wide angle lens and presence detector for energy saving The graphic display allows access with a guided procedure to the different functions provided by the device for example e Easy access to the name directory e Reading of absence messages e Map of access path e Easy user code entry The call module allows entry to the building also by entering a user code on the alphanumeric keypad in this case it is also possible to manage a duress function that allows a silent alarm to be sent to the concierge switchboard at the same time as the door being opened Specific functions for disabled people are also available
238. not higher than the max configured number To use these features the first step is to create at least one zone and define its behaviour in the system To access zone management select the item Zones from the devices tree The FrontEnd shows the zones already present in the system Figure 190 Technical Guide System z E Time Profile Access i cy Access Profiles an e ec 1 Door Profiles ma Hame Type e i o Provery cal module os i Ee d Engt a kat Fitness Anpa Ant pass back Delete F m Primary eniry pane AS Blocis fi a th Tle FLR r ca Key readers Horo Special decoders Hy Switchboards a IP VoF phones tea kb Vice seners External person groups C Hew d vit i Jap Zones F Finess 4rea Figure 190 Advanced functions configuration Zone List To add a new zone click on the button Add zone in the page title Figure 191 shows the page used to enter data the table shows the fields and their meaning 233 Name Type Temporization Name Fitness Area Type Both Temporisation 30 min zero to infinite Threshold 10 Doors list Pedestrian Main Entrance Call Module Rear Door Secondary Entrance Vehicle entrance gate Main Entrance Call Moc Vehicle Entrance gate Garage Access Reade Confirm Input doors A Output doors Cancel Figure 191 Advanced functions configuration Anti pass back zone data entering Zone nam
239. nterfaces Der 2 Der 3 Der 4 Table 2 Assignment of derived stations to the intercom interfaces After a call the derived stations 1 5 9 13 will ring at the same time then the stations 2 6 10 14 then the 3 7 11 15 and finally the 4 8 12 16 45 Per VOICE CALL PRIORITY CALL PICKUP TIME AND GUARANTEED CONVERSATION TIME IPervoice system manages 7 call priority levels as shown in Table 3 A higher number means that the call is more important and has higher priority 6 call module or IP video door unt 4 Apartment station outside the apartment Table 3 Call priority To define the logic implemented in the priority table it is necessary to consider the different phases of a call during its life cycle These three phases are the following Call pickup time The call has been forwarded to the apartment station which has emitted Time T1 the ringer tone selected by the user the system is waiting for the user to answer This time can be configured by the installer via web frontend resident on the IPervoice server By default its value is 60 seconds Starting from this moment the communication is UNINTERRUPTIBLE i e it cannot be interrupted by a communication with the same or lower priority Guaranteed conversation f the user answers the call enters in this state for a time that can be time configured By default 30 seconds When this time is elapsed the Time T2 communication is defined as
240. nts are originated by a device or a specific function they can be selected with the pull down menu for instance Call Module Apartment or Switchboard The same as above for event destination Some events have additional data the type changes according to the event The pull down menu is used to limit the search to a specific type for instance Badge Code Coercion Alarm This field is used to search a specific Key Code The data can be entered also in a driven mode using the Encoder 125 device For further information see the paragraph Automatic Key Code Wizard on page 192 After selecting the desired search methods press the button Search the FrontEnd will query the IPervoice server for the events that meet the configured filter criteria 271 Per VOICE 13 10 2 SEARCH IN THE SYSTEM LOG IN MULTI SITE MODE In Multi Site system the summary page of IPervoice system log is extended to include the logs of all the system sites In this way the user can easily perform searches configure filters on all the present sites without changing the window Figure 236 shows a typical example of search page in Multi Site mode E Log Log Search Delete log Export log Quit log Page number 0 x lt lt lt gt gt Athletes Village NO3 FWAN Athletes Village NO7 FW3 0 Athletes Vilage N10 FW3 0 Athletes Village NI15 FW 3 0 PlotNO1 Piot NO2 Piot NO3 PlotNO4 PlotN09 PloiN1O PiotN13 PiotN14 PlotN15
241. o Mozilla Firefox Browser other Internet browsers such as Opera or Internet Explorer could need different procedures to perform save operations 246 Per VOICE W Warning It is suggested to always perform the data backup every time the system is changed in order to restore its configuration if it is necessary to go back to the previous condition It is also suggested to perform a backup after the changes have been made in order to restore the system if the IPervoice server is replaced 13 1 1 BACKUP OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DATA IN MULTI SITE MODE To make backup of a multi site plant the system requires an extra step before starting the procedure Figure 203 This step is necessary to give the operator the option to back up data on all the multi site servers recommended or to save only a single server B Configuration backup and restore Allsites Plot5 Plot 6 Plots Test 3 1 Server 1 Test3 1 Server 2 Test 3 1 Server 3 I Previous Next Figure 203 System maintenance System configuration backup in multi site mode site selection Once the desired selection by pressing the Next button will start the procedure as required At the end after saving the file the page in Figure 204 will show to the user the operation result B Configuration backup and restore Backup all data Backup has succeeded Database was saved ina TAR file Plot 5 10 1 5 1 Plot 6 10 1 6 1 Plot 8 10 1 8 1 Test 3 1
242. o access to its configuration page as shown in Figure 128 Oe Decoder name Decoder iI Decoder number Device status ALIVE Polling Confirm Name Code Apartmentt Al Delete Apartment A2 Delete Figure 128 4 user Decoders configuration Configuration data 175 Per VOICE The following table shows the modifiable data the same data that can be configured with the StartUp Wizard Up to four apartments can be associated to each decoder in this configuration page it is possible to add delete or change data For all information concerning the apartments configuration refer to the chapter Apartments Configuration on page 181 Decoder Name Name assigned to the decoder required field Maximum length 32 characters Decoder Number Decoder unique numeric code in the respective gateway domain Required field Values from 1 to 270 Device status Device status detected by the system The status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Table 41 4 user Decoders configuration Parameters meaning 10 3 LIFT INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Lift interface modules 1039 37 are used to command lift control units in order to enable visitors to go up only to some floors according to the called apartment Lift control units are driven by changing the status of one or more inputs of these control units with corresponding command relays Also lift interface modules are associated to a Block and
243. o change the password from the default value to the value required To perform this function on the call module enter as username the apartment topological code followed by the password set using this function Numeric field Minimum length fixed 8 characters Absence message active If selected an absence message described below is displayed on the call module when the apartment is called Absence message Absence message displayed on call modules Maximum length 60 alphanumeric characters Apt Logo Image in png format Portable Network Graphics shown by the call module when the apartment is called Image max size 110 x 170 pixel Table 43 Call modules settings meaning of configuration parameters The default password is 12345678 for all the apartments By changing the default password the system also allows to configure a different password for each apartment of the building To convert an image from other graphic formats as jpeg gif or bmp to png the application Paint provided with Windows operating systems can be used or other similar utilities 82 This is the size of the image shown by the call module display bigger images will automatically be scaled 186 Per VOICE 11 3 3 PATH IMAGES This paragraph will deal with subjects already described in the previous section In this case the target is the visitor helping them to visually find the Block that includes the apartment they are visiting Fo
244. o door phone service are the following e Call code configuration topologic or logic e Ringer and call source management e Call priority off hook waiting time and assured e Audio channel management on the riser column communication time choice methods e Call module lock management e Communications to the IP network e Intercom function between the apartments Intercom function inside the apartment e Floor call management CALL CODE CONFIGURATION To call an apartment a concierge switchboard a VolP telephone or simply a system user these devices must be uniquely identified this identifier is named call code IPervoice provides the installer with two modes for assigning the call codes The first one is based on the system topologic diagram and it is also the system internal logic the second one used as an alternative method makes it possible to associate every topologic code to an arbitrary name which has a clear meaning for the user Letters and numbers can be used to create the code both the codes can contain 8 digits max 43 Per VOICE In the model based on the topologic code the eight digits are divided into 4 pairs each pair is used to identify a hierarchical portion of the system as shown in Figure 15 In the example the first pair identifies the building or block B1 the second the stair S2 the third the floor F4 and the fourth and last the apartment A1 If the system is properly structu
245. oard select from the pull down menu the switchboard to which the call must be sent gt All Switchboards The call is sent to all switchboards gt Competence area switchboards The call is sent only to switchboards which have competence in the apartment The max number of available buttons depends on expansion modules 1038 17 installed onthe IP video door unit 135 Per VOICE VoIP Phone The call is sent to the VoIP telephone selected from the pull down menu Apartment This is the most used function In this case the call is sent to a special apartment The selection is made by indicating the apartment topological code with the respective pull down menus Table 33 Advanced Configuration Call Button configuration parameters on IP video door unit 9 3 3 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Also the IP video door unit can send special commands when a specific event occurs which in this case is linked to a call button press The outputs which can be controlled are the IP special decoder ones 1039 80 Special functions Drive output on Call Not assigned Outputs F Output List special decoder relay 1 specal decoder relay 2 SD 4 Alarm relay 1 SD 4 Alarm relay 2 Confirm Reboot ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF TOGGLE TOGGLE TOGGLE TOGGLE Cancel Figure 84 Advanced Configuration Special Functions configuration on IP video door units The available commands and respective configuration parameters ar
246. ode or similar to Figure 169 in Multi Site system To change a profile click on the profile name to add a profile press the button Add a profile under the desired name category ce Time Profile Door a Tire Profile Access ee Technical Guide System ee maTi 3 Time Profile Access Name am Hokdeys i CY Access Proties l CT i is off Door Profies Hame 3 33 Primary cat module m Primary entry panel i Flay Stocks un Pun i eal Key readers i oo Special decoders i jy Switchboards i Rip Vap ohon Chnsbmas Holiday Belts Figure 168 Advanced functions configuration Time profiles list ey Tene Profile Access f Ta i Time Profile Door ka Time Profile Access cfs H ii v Montya External Person Door Profie Delete CY Access Profiles er all Door Profiles 4 Switchboards Hamme fa as External person groups Standard Access Time Profile Delete is fa Veer custom fans Extemal Person Access Profile Delete Maa Athletes Vilage NOB FW3 0 ae a a Athletes Vilage NOT Fw3 0 fa a Athletes Vilage H10 Fwva o B RE Athletes V nge N1S FW 3 0 Name ake Plot NOT Christmas Hobday Delete Figure 169 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Time profiles list 212 Per VOICE 12 1 1 TIME PROFILE DOOR After entering the door time profile management function the installer will access a page as shown in Figure 170 used to enter data needed for
247. of different options 155 i er VOICE Special buttons The system executes the command on the configured outputs when the special button selected from the pull down menu is pressed The available values are Button 1 to Button 250 These are configurable buttons Drive output on Door The system executes the command when the user in the apartment Opening station requests a door lock release Drive output on Gate Command similar to the previous one executed when the vehicle entrance Opening gate is opened Self insertion button The system executes the command when the auto on button is pressed see the paragraph Auto on cyclic mono and bidirectional audio on page 60 for more information about the auto on function In this section it is possible to configure the cameras the images coming from these cameras are displayed in the apartment during the auto on cyclic function There are two lists the left one contains the cameras available in the system call modules and video servers cameras the right one contains the selected cameras Absence Presence button When the user changes the resident absence presence status by pressing the absence presence button in the apartment the system executes the command on the configured outputs Alarm signal The system executes the command in case of alarm event coming from the apartment issued from the panic alarm button of apartment stations or alarm interface 1039 61 Tab
248. ofile ID Identification code assigned by the system to the access profile Required field if Door Code or Key Code data have been entered Table 56 System maintenance Resident and External data import log W Warning the template export doesn t generate a static model but a log file that represents the system configuration For this reason it is necessary to perform the export procedure each time it is needed to enter new names or update previously loaded data Open the file with a generic text editor the structure is shown in the following figure m re es peroo pony or RR E File Modifica Formato Visualizza Resident external Topo code Group ID Last Name FIRST Name Visible Phone Number Forward phone number Door code Key code access profile ID Resident B2S51F111 00 Resident B2Z51F112 000 Resident B2S1FLAL sy 500 gt Resident B2S51F1IA2 5 5005 Resident B2ZS1F1A3 000 Resident B2SLFLA4 y 0549 Resident B251F2A1 5 Res i dent P B251F5A5 iP Pate ee External ls ssseaas Externmal 2 se008 Figure 230 System maintenance Export file For Resident group the system exports a row 11 for each system apartment for External a row for each External persons groups member configured during the installation 13 8 1 COMPILING THE IMPORT FILE Open the file and enter data according to structure and limits shown in Table 56 If more than one resident must be added in the sa
249. on the system outputs The function is active if it occurs the outputs selected from the list Output List are activated Figure 77 The available command modes are the following e ON when the event occurs the output is activated e OFF when the event occurs the output is deactivated e TOGGLE when the event occurs the output changes its status W Warning the options ON and OFF are valid only if the output on the command device has been configured in bistable mode The special functions that can activate a command event for the configured outputs are the following Drive output on call Drive output on Hold up Alarm Drive output on Tamper Alarm Drive output on Special Code 9 2 5 DOORS The system performs the command on the configured outputs when a video door phone call occurs The system performs the command on the outputs when a hold up alarm is generated The system performs the command in case of call module tampering available on 1039 14 and 1039 13 e g opening attempt The system performs the command if a special code is entered on the call module keypad The IP call modules can manage two on board outputs which are used to open for example a pedestrian door or control automation equipment To enable the call module to perform these operations access to the Frontend function in order to add the doors to be controlled This operation must be performed for each call module that must be ena
250. one FrontEnd usage Read only database R A data conflict has been detected As if pre ATA Wil RRI H Goto server Goto mobile Figure 255 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Data conflict local data will be overwritten W Note EDIT DATA menu item is visible only when lperVoice sa fe is directly started without synchronization with the server also in this case the previously described warnings are valid 285 Per VOICE 14 5 2 BACK TO SERVER MODE ON LINE MODE When all configuration operations in Mobile mode Local Mode have been completed to make changes effective follow the reverse procedure and go back to Server mode To do this select the item SWITCH TO SERVER MODE from IperVoice sa fe main menu The user must confirm by pressing the button Yes in the dialog window shown in Figure 256 The application will be switched to Server Mode In Server Mode all the Ipervoice s configuration modification are applied directly on the Server NN Before switching to Server Mode all local configuration will be synchronized on the server 2 Are you sure you want to switch in Server Mode Yes Figure 256 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Back to Server mode confirm IPervoice performs some preliminary consistency operations Figure 257 Switch to server e Synchronization started KA Application check need update wA Application already updated A Database updated Figure 257
251. one and so on If the camera is also provided with a microphone as in the call modules the user by picking the handset up or pressing the listening button in case of hands free apartment station can perform an environmental listening function or also open a bidirectional communication Garage Garage entrance Camera Camera itm mmm mm m ee eee eee cee mie mir commie j East Side 3 West Side A oid Lee 4 tee i HS i r t gt East Block West Block sm a E jji O z n East Block EO Primary Call Module Garage Primary Call Module j East Side G West Side IP Video Server hm 1039 69 ee er Figure 20 CCTV service 59 Per VOICE CAMERA SELECTION The association among cameras and users or groups of users is configured by the installer with the configuration web frontend present on the IPervoice server By pressing the button on his apartment station the user will request the system to select the next camera present in the list associated to that user Groups of cameras specific for some users and other groups shared among different users can be defined The Figure 20 shows a typical example East Side The users living in this zone i e in the East building can see the images coming from the camera of their main call module and the images coming from the cameras installed inside the ga
252. onversation with the visitor After the control the user can decide whether or not to press the door lock release button to let the visitor in The user activates the auto on function to perform a check with the system cameras If the user sees somebody he picks the handset up to activate the mono directional audio Then he presses again the button and proceeds with the cyclic function the audio link does not move to the other cameras By pressing for 3 seconds the auto on button he activates the bidirectional audio the video link is moved back to the visitor camera and he speaks with him 60 Per VOICE 5 7 THE ACCESS CONTROL SERVICE The IPervoice system is provided with an embedded access control service used to control the opening of different passages such as doors gates barriers and so on after identification of proximity keys 1125 50 To control the way opening both the call modules 1039 13 and 1039 14 can be used which are provided with an embedded proximity reader or the IP key reader 1039 88 can be used In Figure 21 a typical example for the reader location is shown on the left there is a main call module placed near the pedestrian gate on the building perimeter and a secondary call module installed on the building entrance door The IP key reader on the right is used to open the parking barrier placed in front of the garage entrance IP Call Module 1039 14 IP Reading Head 1039 88 Figure 21 Contro
253. oor units PE with buttons e P key readers used to manage access control by proximity keys or wireless remote controls e Concierge switchboards Windows Vista or Windows 7 PC e VolP telephones e Video servers to which up to 4 traditional analogue cameras can be connected e Special decoders relay output modules that can be programmed by the system e PoE switches for powering Pervoice devices e P CAT5 gateways used to connect the IP network to the riser column inside a building e iModo 7 touch screen IP terminals described in the chapter about devices present in the apartment on page 30 The following list includes all the devices with their main characteristics 15 Main technical characteristics CCD colour camera with wide angle lens 108 H x 87 V Embedded proximity key reader compatible with keys 1125 50 Infrared proximity detector detection Management of audio repeater device for the hard of hearing 3 5 colour graphic display with advanced Graphical User Interface GUI Simultaneous management of electrical lock with pulse capacitive discharge SE SE a relay contact C NC NO 30V 3 5A max Second relay for operating an automatic gate C NO 30V 200 mA max Input for entrance hall button exit switch Input for open door contact Alphanumeric keypad with 18 buttons 3 of them are multifunction 1 RJ45 Ethernet port for the connection to the IP network Power supply PoE 48V
254. or doors managed by IP key readers Figure 148 in the section indicated by number 2 shows this condition Access profile Custom Access Used door code Used key code 2 E Start validity 2011 05 17 08 02 amp F Endvalidity 2012 05 17 08 02 Suspended Main Entrance Call Module Pedestria Vehicle entrance gatd West Entrance Call Module E d Pedestrian Vehicle entrance gatd reader Garage Access Reader i Vehicle entrance gat Parking Access Reader Parking barrief B Figure 148 Key Code configuration Data entry W Note It is also possible to assign proximity keys to residents with a guided procedure using the device Encoder 125 as described in the paragraph Automatic Key Code Wizard on page 198 196 Key Code Time Profile Start validity End validity Suspended Color Selected Door For Key Code i er VOICE Proximity key identification code Required field in hexadecimal format Fixed length 8 characters W Note the identification code is engraved on the back of the key Selection of Door lock release time profile if available see paragraph Time Bands on page 62 The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains the previously programmed profiles if present For information about time profiles refer to the chapter Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Access on page 214 Defaul
255. ore performing updating operations The Table 55 explains the meaning of the columns in the list Device Name Name of the device Device Type Type of the device Status Device operating status detected by the system The status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Actual fw Version of firmware running on the device Expected fw Version expected for the device This data is used after a server updating operation to know if all the devices have been correctly updated In this case the version displayed in this column is the one that will appear in the column Actual fw after upgrade Date Release date of the firmware version installed on the device It refers to the column Actual fw Status fw Firmware upgrade status Used during the Firmware Upgrade phase to verify the operation state Once the phase is completed the display will show Completed Table 55 System maintenance Meaning of system consistency data In case of multi site installations the information relating to the others Pervoice servers are also indicated in this way the operator can verify the state of operation before proceeding to any updates to the system 250 Per VOICE 13 4 IPERVOICE SERVER UPGRADE The upgrade of Pervoice server firmware allows to install new versions of system applications if new functions and improvements to existent features have been released To perform the procedure the file 102 must be av
256. ot included because all functions can be accessed by touch screen graphic interface For hands free devices this condition ts activated with the dedicated button Conversation 82 r VOICE Idle state Audio Video Idle state IP P Handset on hook eee o kosk communication with Handset off hook q ge fa q M Door lock release 1 Door lock release 1 Door lock release 1 Door lock release 2 Call button 7 Door lock release 2 Special button 6 Call button 6 Special button 6 Special button 5 Call button 5 Special button 5 ND ND ee Call button 5 e Floor call ring tone ee ee ee NA NA Video door phone call 00o 00o T NA NA a i ring tone change mm Table 12 Apartment stations configuration Functions assigned to main buttons Auto on next Video answering Bidirectional audio camera cycle machine on Auto on The Table 13 shows the functions available in presence of additional button module 1083 96 as in the previous case the highlighted functions are those that can be programmed by the installer Idle state Audio Video Idle state Se Handset on hook communication with Handset off hook Handset off hook Automatic door lock Automatic door lock Automatic door lock eee ae a Specialbutton 4 Call button 4 Special button 4 Presence Absence Presence Absence Presence Absence aa ae ae Table 13 Apartment stations configuration Functions assigned to additional buttons Addi
257. other functions by means of its configurable buttons MODO touch screen video door phone 1717 1 The video door phone 1717 1 is provided with a large touch screen 7 display The GUI is user friendly and can be directly accessed from the touch screen display In addition to the traditional video door phone functions other features offered by the IPervoice system are available among these the most relevant ones are the following e intercom callto any user of the same column e intercom call to any apartment door phones using intercom interface 1039 36 e Call to any of the switchboards 1039 41 or VolP telephones 4501 5 present in the system e Activating commands for any special decoder 1039 80 present on the IP network If there are one or more video door phones MODO 1717 1 a power supply 1039 20 must always be installed inside the apartment 35 SIGNO video door phone 1740 1 b w monitor 1740 40 colour monitor The video door phone SIGNO is designed to have a minimal extra slim style In fact it is the slimmest on the market In the version with black and white monitor 1740 1 it is provided with a 4 display in the colour version 1740 40 with a 4 display In addition to the door lock release button SIGNO is equipped with 3 auxiliary buttons which can be programmed by the system Features for the hard of hearing are embedded in the device m G j yy j Main technical characteri
258. ouble click on the icon Urmet on desktop The first way must be used in Server mode to switch to Mobile mode the second one when in Mobile mode and operating without being connected to IPervoice server 1 After starting the application using these two ways the user will see the following screens shown in Figure 249 mostra le videate che si presentano all operatore avviando l applicazione nei modi indicati In the first case the user can automatically access the system main page because username and password are sent to IperVoice sa fe in the second case the user must access from the login page because the application has been manually launched TAE pavon 2 aaa bel SEDE EEE Fian yu Ae PRT ay rane ee Dear ne m p f Sintec Paier heim gi Ei pefu pamm Fp esy l dea ri f Ghia POG yo D a ar o feet H a a Tasas lenis tes p Ej fe bei i ae i Simt A p T e al Fri i sa n i z Bieg ihi p Bg Pes a oe Ha ji Prom tit Coie r g w 1 Coty j voice j er vek ee gt gt i pian jT Motile hone me sa i ie mn 1 S yea E iN Cmim ara i lea Gh ararat ier ria Matai pewter agatha pa i i GL Despre karais Miadabii aoia dma a Sk Figure 249 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage IperVoice sa fe application launched from FrontEnd and manually 122 This is the only option available without being connected to the system because the FrontEnd can t be a
259. ow the above described rules 4 Technical Guide System Time Profiles Primary call module Primary entry panel T B iF Blocks E Pacsa nl Main Block in West Block B P west stair E Secondary call module secondary entry panel ES Gateway West Tower ES Floors gG Floori amp Foor go Floors go Floord go Floors amp Roof Floor Figure 228 System maintenance Selection of system component to be deleted Foor name Fioori Floor2 Floors Floor Floors Roof Floor Floor code F1 F2 F3 F F5 F 265 Per VOICE 13 8 TEMPLATE EXPORT The two functions described below allow the installer to load residents and externals data by importing data from a text file This feature is very useful if many data must be entered or the same information must be entered many times for ex the assignment to an access profile 108 Before importing data it is needed to export the template To do this select the item Export template in the menu Maintenance as shown in Figure 229 MAINTENANCE SRV LOG SEARCH CONFIGURATION p E T T Ne Ea ES restore Write to mobile Import Data EACL RE Figure 229 System Maintenance Template export The user will be asked to save the file with the template which will be used later to import data to the PC The name suggested by the system is ipervoice_import csv select the desired folder and save the file The file structure is as fol
260. partment stations buttons this subject will be dealt with in the chapter Apartment advanced configuration Call Buttons on page 188 Apartment Config 15 12 ok Bl Apartment Config q 15 13 ok Apartment Config Apartment Config Site Technical Guide System Site Technical Guide System Block West Block 82 Block West Block B2 Sav Stair West ne Stair West neo Site Technical Guide System Site Technical Guide System Decoder IF Decoderl Decoder IF Decodert Block West Block Block West Block Apartment Apartment2 Stair West Stair Stair West Stair Dec Decoderl Dec Decoder 1 Apt Apartment2 Apt Apartment2 if Port N 1 BLOCK STAIR FLOOR Port N nip Button 1 a Button 2 NE memes RO 3 fone a Button2 o o MMH an lock Stai faoc A buttons i Button 5 Button4 Button 6 Buttons NAME Apartment2 Button 7 none Figure 123 SoftMobile Windows Mobile and Symbian versions Apartment parameters reading SEARCH FEATURE The SoftMobile application is provided with a search function that allows to easily identify a device in the system To use this function the procedure changes according to Windows Mobile or Symbian version In the first case click on the MENU item right bottom and then on the Search item In the second case click on the item Options left bottom and then on the Search item Figure 124 shows both the si
261. ply unit 1039 34 1039 50 1039 20 l l l l l IMAGO Video doorphones 1707 01 j l 1 l l l l EE ir E o eee pa l l l l Ml IP Call Module 1039 14 IP System Server 1039 1 Figure 12 Video door phone service Basic diagram Alternative options are possible a configuration in which the system is fully implemented on the IP network and the apartment stations are VoIP telephones 4501 5 Figure 13 or another configuration where there are no apartment stations but only concierge switchboards 1039 41 and if necessary door units based on the module 1039 72 Figure 14 In practice the basic configurations described above can be combined to create mixed installations VoIP Telephones 4501 5 IP Call Module 1039 14 AS IP System Server 1039 1 Figure 13 Video door phone service VoIP Apartment stations 42 Per VOICE a Switch 4 4 PoE Ports 1039 44 Secondary IP Entry Panel 1039 72 BE m a aini iste Sede Concierge Switchboards 1039 41 Badidae a B A Primary IP System Server IP Call Module 1039 1 1039 14 Figure 14 Video door phone service Configuration with concierge sw itchboards 5 1 1 SERVICES FUNCTIONS The main functions provided by the vide
262. previous screen press the button Submit to download me config dat file After the download is completed the file is shown as a simplified devices tree The application searches all the memory card files that have dat extension The selection of the config dat file must be performed only the first time or if it must be selected from a folder different from the previously configured one The application saves the selection and automatically loads its contents each time it is executed 163 Per VOICE br 0 03 bk Config aco 0 04 Apri Cartela Tutte le cartel a ia CNAME gj CNAME aj CNODE h CNODE a FACES FACES Figure 114 SoftMobile Windows Mobile version config dat file selection CONFIG DAT FILE SELECTION AND DOWNLOAD SYMBIAN The SoftMobile application in Symbian version uses an external utility to download the config dat file This application is called Database Manager and is installed in the same folder containing the SoftMobile main application To load the config dat file first of all the user must close the SoftMobile application if open on the PDA then launch the Database Manager application After this a page as shown in Figure 115 will be displayed The available options as follows Change Path Allows selection of the folder in which the config dat file has been downloaded Fill Database Once selected the desired config dat file this option makes it
263. put List Figure 141 advanced configuration Special functions setting 189 Per VOICE Even though the commands for special decoders 1039 80 outputs are similar to those already described for example on page 128 or page 139 there are two options described in the following table and concerning two new aspects the special buttons and the cameras activated in auto on cycle Special buttons The system executes the command on the configured outputs when the special button the same selected from the pull down menu is pressed The available values are Button 1 to Button 6 These are configurable buttons they are active if pressed when the apartment station is in stand by the handset is on hook Drive output on Door The system executes the command when the user in the apartment Opening station requests a door lock release Drive output on Gate Command similar to the previous one executed when the vehicle entrance Opening gate is opened Auto on button The system executes the command when the auto on button is pressed see the paragraph Auto on cyclic mono and bidirectional audio on page 60 for more information about the auto on function In this section it is possible to configure the cameras the images coming from these cameras are displayed in the apartment during the auto on cyclic function There are two lists the left one contains the cameras available in the system call modules and video servers c
264. r lt 4 JABA LELLE Site 3 i i EGG iPervoice Site Server iPervoice Site Server 4 a amm meyen ee Se T a ad lal sll J Jaks babe dkh shefa kateter Fe ieie Feta ee Eo fos ft wd ba r ft B asteme EE IAP assssaramT TELLLELLLLS arna p 2 a a S a ai 38 Figure 11 Multi Site architecture Block diagram Per VOICE In this example each site implements separately from the others its communication infrastructure independently from the other system components In this way any maintenance or extension operation or a possible failure will not compromise the proper operation of each single site 4 6 1 SWITCHBOARD INSTALLATION In a Multi Site system switchboards are used to manage the system so it is important to properly define where they must be connected to system IP network There are two valid solutions 1 Inside the IP network of a site in the example the switchboard 1 and 3 2 To the infrastructure network level the switchboard 2 In case of malfunction or maintenance of the network intrastructure level the first solution allows the operation of a switchboard only for the site where the switchboard is connected Select this option when in emergency situations a minimal reduction of features is admitted for one or more switchboards or when the service must be kept active also in critical conditions The second solution provides more featu
265. r each call module associated to the apartment it is possible to choose an image that will appear on the display when the door is opened to let the visitor in The image usually a map is used to highlight the path to be followed to reach the desired Block import an image West Entrance Call Module import an image Browse Clea Figure 139 Apartment advanced configuration Choosing Graphic maps In the configuration page there is a list of call modules where the help map can be set Figure 139 The following table contains all the information needed to set the required parameters Name of the call module Under the call module name shown in the example of Figure 139 Main Entrance Call Module or West Entrance Call Module there is a selection box if selected path map visualization is enabled The system disables the saving if the file is not present and the cell is selected Import an image Field used to import the image in png format Portable Network Graphics displayed by the call module after the entrance door has been opened As for all other similar cases click the Browse button to select the desired image file Table 44 Graphic maps of access paths meaning of configuration parameters 83 To convert an image from other graphic formats as jpeg gif or bmp to png the application Paint provided with Windows operating systems can be used or other similar utiliti
266. r phones and video door phones available at the moment for Pervoice are provided in their wall mounting bracket with two dip switch groups that the installer must correctly set in order to allow the system to correctly address video door phones The first group is composed by two dip switches used to set the number of 4 user decoder port to which the apartment station is connected the second group composed by four dip switches allows to assign to the apartment station the identification number inside the apartment from O to 15 PDA acronym of Personal Digital Assistant 7 These models are the following MODO 1717 1 IMAGO 1701 1 SIGNO 1740 1 and 1740 40 and door phone 1139 2 80 Per VOICE In both cases the numbering follows the binary system the Figure 30 and the Figure 31 show the possible configurations concerning decoder and apartment Port O DER1 Port1 DER2 Port2 DER3 Port 3 DER4 Figure 30 Apartment stations configuration Dip switch for programming 4 user decoder port number YW Warning _ if in the apartment there is only one apartment station its identification number must always be O zero because it is the Master station If there are no intercom interfaces 1039 36 3 apartment stations max can be added their identification number must be between 1 and 3 Without intercom interfaces 1039 36 With Intercom Interfaces DP 12 DP 13 Figure 31 Apartment stations configur
267. rage and on the garage entrance West Side The users living in the West building can see the images coming from the camera of their main call module and the images coming from the cameras installed inside the garage and on the garage entrance AUTO ON CYCLIC MONO AND BIDIRECTIONAL AUDIO The CCTV service is activated by pressing the auto on button by pressing again the button again the user performs the cyclic displaying of the next configured camera To perform the environmental listening function with a selected camera the user can activate the mono directional audio by picking the handset up or pressing the specific button of a hands free apartment station By pressing the auto on button for at least 3 seconds a beep will confirm this operation the user can activate the bidirectional audio in order to speak with the person who is in front of the camera W Warning once activated the audio communication remains active with the selected call module even if the user presses the button to proceed with the cyclic display To explain this feature two different examples can be used A visitor arrives at the main entrance and calls an apartment The user answers and speaks to the visitor before opening the door by pressing repeatedly the auto on button on the apartment station the user activates the cyclic mode to perform a video control on the other cameras The audio communication remains locked with the call module to allow the c
268. ration Adding an apartment Name Apartment name Max length 32 characters Topological code It is the unique code of the apartment The user selects the floor from the pull down menu and enters the last part of the topological code Required field fixed length 2 alohanumeric characters ex 01 A1 1A AB Logical Code Unique logical code of the apartment Available only if the system is configured in logical addressing mode Required field length from 2 to 8 alphanumeric codes Table 53 Adding an IP apartment Meaning of basic configuration data 210 i er VOICE 12 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS CONFIGURATION This chapter describes IPervoice system special or advanced functions used to realize specific tasks This section will treat the following arguments gt Time profile management Doors Passages Holidays Access profile management Door profile management Call modules IP key readers Group configuration for externals User custom fields configuration Access zones configuration Pervoice server configuration Y Vv V V V V WV FrontEnd users management Operation in Multi Site mode In Multi Site mode the scope of some features in the list will be extended to all the sites present in the system Although these functions are locally managed by each site server they can be managed in centralized mode in IPervoice system allowing a better management and more flexibility These specific features include Time profile ma
269. re continue Do you want to start synchronization now Goto server Goto mobile 7 Syncironmirauon startet J Applicaton check need update Apphcation updated Figure 252 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Switching to Mobile mode data synchronization request 284 The user can choose among the following options gt OK the system will start data synchronization which will transfer IPervoice server data on the local database gt Gotoserver no data will be synchronized the system will return to Server mode without any operations lperVoice sa fe will not be activated gt Goto mobile no data will be synchronized but the system will go to Mobile mode lperVoice sa fe will be activated However after synchronization it is possible to access FrontEnd on Pervoice server to avoid losing changes performed with lperVoice sa fe IPervoice server database will be read only This condition is indicated by the following message 3 This database it s read only You can t update insert or delete datas Figure 253 Stand Alone FrontEnd usage Read only database W Warning If it is necessary to change server data the operation can be forced by selecting the item EDIT DATA from the FrontEnd main menu which is visible only when the system is in Mobile mode see Figure 254 Consider that in this case local changes will be lost Figure 255 FWUPGRADE Jer EDIT UPDATE SYSTEM Figure 254 Stand Al
270. red and the apartment position inside the system is known the code for calling an apartment is easy to find Block Stair Floor ce ny NAN Pi EBS is ea A 3 Figure 15 Call code Topologic diagram The logic model is totally independent from the system structure in this case the diagram is totally free and can be adapted to any requirement W Warning the system accepts the call codes only in the selected mode Nevertheless by changing the mode the codes defined in the mode not being used are not deleted from the system and can be used again by restoring the previous mode RINGER MANAGEMENT AND CALL SOURCE Every door phone or video door phone has a set of 5 different ring tones which can be freely selected by the user For example the first ring tone can be associated to the incoming door phone call and one of the other four ring tones to the floor call In this case the floor call will ring using the selected tone for three consecutive seconds For the door phone call in order to identify its source i e from the main or secondary call module from the switchboard or another apartment station the selected ring tone is emitted by inserting a series of pauses according to the diagram shown in the next Table 1 This table contains the tone and pause times and a graphic scheme useful to identify the call ring tone according to its source The procedure used to select the tone Is described in the user manual p
271. res the audio video stream coming from a site door unit and directed to the associated switchboard passes through less network devices in order to reach its destination If a site can not be reached this configuration allows to manage all the others unlike the first case the switchboard is connected to the infrastructure level and is not affected by malfunction inside a specific site Both options can be used in the same system according to requirements as shown in the diagram of Figure 11 4 6 2 IP ADDRESSING INSIDE A MULTI SITE SYSTEM In Multi Site mode it is important to correctly define the IP address range used in the whole system A good design allows to address correctly data among sites reducing traffic in the whole network at the same time it implements a clever address assignment performed by the servers and in case of maintenance allows a fast identification of the device site In IPervoice system IP address assignment to all the devices is performed by the system server with a specific software module called DHCP In Multi Site mode this operation must be carefully executed because each server must provide the address only to the devices belonging to its site Pervoice DHCP module can be configured in a special mode called Blocked for further information see 12 7 Server gt DHCP Acronym of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol protocol that allows to manage in centralized and automatic mode the IP address
272. rmed If the system is configured in Multi Site mode see paragraph 13 11 6 Search in Multi Site Mode on page 276 13 11 1 SEARCH BY LAST NAME This is the default search To start it select the item Person last name and enter the name in the text box near Search The user can enter only some letters of the name IPervoice will show all users with the name starting with these letters In the example Figure 238 there are all the names starting with s 1 Click on the name to access the page used to change data Search by Person lastname Search 5 Search a Last name First name Siver Faul Smith Viibur Speberg Steven Figure 238 Utility functions Search by last name 113 err The search is not case sensitive 273 Per VOICE 13 11 2 SEARCH BY TOPOLOGICAL CODE Use this search mode to find the list of objects with a topological code matching with the selected criteria As shown in Figure 239 four text boxes are available Each one can be used to specify a code part block stair floor apartment Search by Top olo gic code Search B2 S1 F1 F Object type Name Topologic code Apartment Apartment B2 Si Fi Al 4pariment Apartment 2 51F1A2 Apartment Apartment B2S1F1A3 apartment pariment4 Be S1 Fi A apariment apt B251F111 Apartment Apt B2 S1 F112 Block Viesi Block B2 Floor Fi ori B2 51Fi Star West Star B2 51 Figure 239 Utility functions Search by topological code
273. rmed If this happens close the browser and reconnect to the FrontEnd 253 13 4 1 IP DEVICES AUTOMATIC UPGRADE Once the upgrade is completed the system asks to reboot the server to make the new firmware active Once the reboot is completed the server checks the firmware consistency on main IP devices then automatically updates them if needed With the function Check system consistency contained in the item FW UPGRADE of the FrontEnd main menu it is possible to control the progress of the upgrade phase for further details see the paragraph Checking server and IP devices firmware version on page 249 In the Figure 214 for example the firmware upgrade for the devices Main Entrance Call Module and Gateway East Tower is in progress M Check system consistency Device name Device type Status Actual fw Exp fw Date Status fw W Serer Server UNKNOWN 0 4 28 0 4 2 8 2009 09 01 COMPLETED Main Entrance Call Primary Call e A BH SS Ay dita Diese UNKNOWN 0 4 2 6 0 4 2 8 2009 09 01 3 PROGRESS Upgrade amp Gateway EastTower Gateway UNKNOWN 0 4 2 6 0 4 28 2009 09 01 PROGRESS Upgrade Concierge Switchboard ALIVE 1 0 9 5 1 0 9 5 2009 09 01 COMPLETED Figure 214 System maintenance Checking of IP devices firmware W Warning the automatic upgrade phase of IP devices depends on devices number and type and may last some minutes During this time all devices are unusable e g the call module displ
274. rol of outputs Modules 1039 80 are directly connected to the IP network and so can be installed in any place of the residential building There are many sources that can generate an event to be associated to one or more outputs the most important are described in Table 7 Events Special Functions All IP call stations for example 1039 13 Call Duress Tampering Special code Door Opening 1039 14 or 1039 72 main and secondary Concierge switchboard 1039 41 Call Special Code IP key reader 1039 88 Door Opening Apartment by apartment stations Special Buttons Passage opening pedestrian and driveway gate Auto on Absence Presence Status Alarm Panic or Intrusion Table 7 Local Activations Service Main command events if the room monitor is activated on an indoor station belonging to a CAT5 analog riser the duration will be limited to 45 seconds whereafter the system will perform the deactivation in an automatic way The switchboard operator can still reactivate it whenever it deems It necessary 58 Per VOICE 5 6 THE CCTV SERVICE Through the CCTV service the users can display on their video door phones the images captured by the system cameras The cameras can be the call module cameras or those connected via the IP servers The displaying is performed in cyclic mode by pressing the auto on button on the apartment station the user can see the images coming from the first camera then the second
275. rom a device installed on the CAT5 riser column to a device of the IP network For example the user can call a concierge switchboard or a VoIP telephone INTERCOM FUNCTION BETWEEN THE APARTMENTS Besides communications to the IP network a communication between two apartments of the same riser column can be established The call is managed according to the priority diagram of Table 4 on page 47 since it is a door phone call audio only the second audio channel will be used if available INTERCOM FUNCTION INSIDE THE APARTMENT In this case the call is established inside the apartment and so the intercom door phone communication does not use the riser column leaving it available for other communications This function is available using the intercom interface modules 1039 36 See the diagram on Figure 10 on page 33 Each interface can manage 4 derived stations and up to 4 interfaces for each apartment can be installed allowing 16 derived stations The intercom function is available between derived stations The configuration modes can be different according to the model of the installed apartment station Please refer to the booklets provided with the device All the apartments connected to the decoders which are connected to the same IP CAT5 gateway belong to the same column 50 Per VOICE connected to the same interface 1039 36 or also between derived stations connected to different interfaces FLOOR CALL On the 4 us
276. rovided with each device lal Per VOICE Source Audio video call Audio call Main Call Module a Addition of a beep beep at the end of the ring tone sequence Selected door phone ring tone for 3 consecutive seconds Secondary Call HEHHE Addition of a beep beep at the end of Module the ring tone sequence 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF repeated for 5 times Switchboard i H i ll i i i H f l Addition of a beep beep at the end of the ring tone sequence 0 1 sec ON 0 5 sec OFF for 3 times pause 0 2 sec repeated for 5 times Intercom apartment Dwa a Addition of a beep beep at the end of station the ring tone sequence 0 5 sec ON 0 5 sec OFF for 3 times Table 1 Door phone call source RING DELAY When more than one derived station is installed inside the apartment after receiving a call the system does not make the derived stations ring at the same time but in sequence by inserting a 1 second pause between a station and the next If there are one or more intercom interfaces 1039 36 as shown in Figure 10 at page 33 another variation is introduced the derived stations ring in sequence according to the interface to which they are connected and in parallel on different interfaces In a condition of maximum expansion there are 16 derived stations connected to 4 interfaces 1039 36 according to the following diagram that contains the number of the station to be connected to the different ports of the i
277. rring System Data ccccccccccccccccccseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 14 9 2 Bluetooth Programming Interface Identification cc cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeess 292 14 93 Checking C Omi GuratiOn Data pese cere see tedececeses sda cecacusaletiea E E 293 IPERVOICE IN BRIEF ee T i i B Fbag SSS SS ai a i s i et a ee A gt IPervoice is the first digital video door phone system that uses CATS cables throughout both for the external network between different buildings that is fully IP compatible and also for riser columns used to interconnect the apartments for which a specifically dedicated protocol is used The Pervoice structure is designed to satisfy the needs of any residential building even with a large number of users there are no limits for system extension and number of riser columns that can be managed Describing IPervoice simply as a last generation digital video door phone system is not enough The versatility of the system and its modular features can be exploited not only to manage access control but also technological installations such as video surveillance intrusion alarms and fire alarms in addition to many other functions that are fully integrated IPervoice is a system based on an open communication standard The use of the SIP protocol Session Initiation Protocol allows the connection of third party devices that use the sa
278. s 142 Per VOICE 9 5 VIDEO SERVER In order to activate a video server 1039 69 enable on the device the controlled cameras to perform this operation access IPervoice system advanced configuration Select the item Video Server from the devices tree and choose the desired device then press the button Add a camera near the item Camera list as shown in Figure 93 p je t mes Guide System Name Garage Video Servel z Ea e Profiles SIP Address 00_1E_E0_00_14_51 E w Access Profiles e IP Address V7 1689 42 Ss Primary call module A perv ony pan MAC Address 00 1 E 0 00 14 81 nF Blocks FW version 2 0 0 24 a iP Lift al Key readers oo H i Special decoders Device status ALIVE Polling E J Switchboards Confirm Reboot Cancel E b IP VolP phones ead Video servers T Gara ge Video Server E External person groups New device 8 Pei Zones Name Number Main Entrance 0 Delete Figure 93 Advanced Configuration Video Server The next page Figure 94 allows to assign a mnemonic name to the camera and select the video input which it is connected to Table 34 shows meaning and values of each parameter _ Name Main Entrance Number Confirm Cancel Figure 94 Advanced Configuration Adding a new camera to the Video Server 143 Per VOICE Name Camera identifier required alphanumeric field Max length 32 characters
279. s consists in some steps For example to activate an output of a decoder with a special code entered on the keypad of a call module follow the four steps shown in Figure 99 First of all select the Special Decoder to which the command must be sent Step 1 and then define the desired output with its timing parameters Step 2 Identify the Call Module where the user will enter the special code select in the section Special Functions the previously defined output and the command type to be sent Step 3 At A the end go back to the Special Decoder and enter the special code entered by the user on the keypad of the Call Module Step 4 Hasta WEAN L ight oe 2 hn r hamp i Toma U LO Phar Oe Leia Event Tin by vert s rmis eee name Conan Cancel a Pr ibl i b ittetate optics B E B El sam Y Special funceions a Prary pay pees a tH ia sm e E Ih Oege Lint A srs SEPE eS a A odd A hom kine a fe hb E te pupei i a Dumain uni Pia 7 a eh geri CECE Banjar a rune Ana 1 a ea araa TOENN At E cl paierai prere gE rijesi D apa isi mem reirs I hE Petpet te kanja Oad 4 m ad fanny bape i E aieia F ian Tonn bon oe one Daai aa Ligne oy ofr Toc Lorem Warnes WER Hil bamper Tate n Lenii futhon wemi T i TP AETH Beerd apirip bemij nama Dtg pin m fpern Code CH onde se Provence Cal pom Bosimi iod stette Linder Cancel Figure 99 Advanced Configuration Association of the Comm
280. s is extended to 16 max The max distance between an intercom interface output and an apartment station is 50 m gt The max extension among all the devices connected on each intercom interface derived branch must be shorter or equal to 200 m 70 Per VOICE The Table 8 summarizes all the above mentioned constraints Riser distances and extensions Max distance between two column power supply units 1039 20 Max distance between IP Gateway and the last apartment station Riser max extension also if a riser distributor 1039 54 is present Max distance between the riser power supply and the last apartment station connected without intercom interface 1039 36 Apartment derived branch distances and extensions Max distance between 4 user decoder and apartment station or intercom interface Max distance between intercom interface and apartment station Max extension among devices connected on derived branches of a 4 user decoder Max extension among devices connected on derived branches of an intercom interface Max number of devices on the riser and on the apartment derived branch Max number of 4 user decoders Max number of 4 user decoders installed between two riser power supply units Max number of apartment stations that can be installed on 30 decoders max Max number of video door phone apartment stations for each derived branch without intercom interface Max number of door phones e g 1139 2 that can be installe
281. s used to connect the next device This is the mode generally used on all the riser except for intercom interfaces 1039 36 used inside the apartments that use a star topology for their connected apartment stations To correctly perform the riser dimensioning verify that the constraints concerning the following values are respected gt Max Distance it defines the max length for a network branch gt Extension the extension is the sum of all branches lengths that compose a specific network section Three extensions are important the riser extension the extension after 4 user decoders 1309 34 and the extension after intercom interfaces 1039 36 gt Devices number it is the max allowed number of devices that can be connected to riser and derived stations The Figure 25 shows a typical riser with the main constraints to be respected the following two figures highlight relevant details if a decoder 1039 54 is installed at a riser base Figure 26 or when one or more intercom interfaces are used Figure 27 66 Per VOICE Internal wiring topology amp distances i i Q g _ 4 user decoder 1039 34 Max 4 Door Phones per Apartment Power supply unit 4 user decoder 1039 34 Max 9x100m trunks Max 900m Max 9x30 4 users decoder 1039 34 270 4 users decoder Max estension per 4 users decoder 200 m Max 100m Max 30 decoders per trunk 4 user decoder 1039 34 Pow
282. sed until now to access to the FrontEnd Leaving the PC connected to the FrontEnd the configuration data must be downloaded from the IPervoice server to the Mobile device that will be used to program the riser columns Because a direct download is not possible the data must be first downloaded from the Pervoice server to the PC by means of the FrontEnd specific function then from the PC to the Mobile device So connect the PDA to the PC with the USB cable provided with the PDA If the operation has been correctly performed after few moments the Mobile device will be available like any other removable device Figure 109 Cartelle s E Desktop d Pubblica 4 Computer A SystemDisk C ca RECOVERY D c Unita DVD RW E amp DataDisk F Ya eg Nero Scout PDA Phone K Rete E Pannello di controllo 5 Cestino i e 2 elementi Figure 109 Column devices programming procedure PDA PC connection After this preliminary checking the system configuration file can be downloaded from the IPervoice server saved for example on the PC Desktop folder and then copied to the PDA To perform this operation select from the FrontEnd main menu the item MAINTENANCE and then Write to Mobile Figure 110 gt To make the PDA visible a removable device in Explorer tt may be necessary to install some specific software drivers on the PC Please refer to the manuals provide
283. service has its specific function but at the same time it also interacts if necessary with the other services active in the system for example the CCTV service manages the cameras and interacts with the Video door phone service during user activity The platform of IPervoice services is modular and expandable new functions can be added afterwards to improve the system features new versions of already existent functions can also be updated to make the system more robust or efficient At present the following services are managed gt Video door phone gt VoIP telephony gt Concierge switchboard gt Lift control gt Panic gt Video door phone answering service gt Room Monitor gt Voice and Text messages gt Local activations gt Alarms gt CCTV gt Hold up gt Access control 5 1 THE VIDEO DOOR PHONE SERVICE It is the main service of IPervoice system other functions can be added thanks to the interaction with the other services However using the typical characteristics of the service the system can be developed also with various installation models that make it possible to satisfy different requirements For example a typical model as shown in Figure 12 can be implemented in which there are one or more call modules 1039 13 or 14 an IP CATS gateway 1039 50 for every riser column the 4 user decoders 1039 34 and finally the apartment stations as 1707 1 41 Four user decoder Gateway IP CATS Power sup
284. ses follow the indications displayed in interface windows W Warning To correctly perform the installation procedure of IperVoice sa fe application the user must access the PC with System administrator rights otherwise the installation will not be properly performed 14 4 POST INSTALLATION CHECKS When the installation has been completed check that the folder where the application has been installed for ex C Urmet lperVoice sa fe allows the user a complete access to the application To check this gt Start File manager and find the lperVoice sa fe application folder gt Click right and select the menu item Properties gt Select the tab Security and check that the user or the group have the Full control of the folder 281 Per VOICE For its proper operating mode lIperVoice sa fe uses two applications which operate as Windows services The first one is a dedicated web server allowing navigation in pages with Internet Explorer browser the second one allows to store IPervoice system data If one or both have not been started the Stand Alone FrontEnd will not be able to work Services are the following gt safe_httpd dedicated web server gt safe_mysqlid database server W Warning safe_httpd service uses the port 80 http normally used for navigation on web sites It is important to check that on the PC where IperVoice sa fe has been installed another web server is not active on the same
285. smitted later with a SmartPhone as described in the paragraph Column on page 157 In this section the riser column structure is defined composed by gt Number of 4 user decoders 1039 34 present on the column for example one decoder for each floor Number of apartments managed by each 4 user decoder from 0 to 4 Presence of alarm interface 1039 61 in the apartment Number of door phones and or video door phones in each apartment Number of intercom interfaces 1039 36 in the apartment Y Vv V V WV If in the system there are one or more intercom interfaces number of door phones and or video door phones associated to each interface The Figure 47 shows the section 3 concerning the column devices that is split into three areas identified as follows e A Area dedicated to the definition of 4 user decoders connected to the gateway eB Area for adding new floors ec Area dedicated to the definition of apartments and respective internal devices 101 i Decoder 1 4 i eee n a EEE Ee ee nent Lis A i Apt Name Dec Output _Floor code Apt code te am intercom Tera T Add a Floor interfaces 7 X e e i a _ eee E E E 1 Y B 5 gt 0 New Floor Name Floor2 Code F2 i 4 Confirm Cancel l a A s s E EA Apartment O DER1 Fl 01 none a 0 od A F Apartment2 1 DER2 Fl 02 none hi 0 1 j Apartment 2 DER3 Fi 03 none
286. so called Entry Panel Figure 51 As in the previous case select the devices from the list shown by the system click on Next page button to start configuration OOME EO FF FF 31 192 168 2 14 Figure 51 Startup Wizard List of new IP Video door units Last Name Secondary Entrance IP address 192 168 2 14 MAC address OO 1E E0 FF FF 34 FW version 2 0 0 21 Device status ALIVE Entry panel type Primary e Figure 52 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new IP Video door unit For the first Entry Panel configuration made with StartUp Wizard only the data used to identify the device and its type are needed In order to use this device in the system the installer must complete the configuration by entering other data as described in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration IP Video Door Unit Entry Panel on page 124 Name Entry panel identifier required field Max length 32 characters IP address IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the call module MAC address Device unique physical address Used to identify the devices during configuration FW version Application software version of the call module 107 i er VOICE Device status Device status detected by the system the status can be e UNKNOWN The device is not configured or not yet polled by the system e POLL IN PROGRESS The server is polling the device to obtain status
287. ss it is possible to directly call the switchboard using its logic or topological code The switchboard can call apartment stations VoIP phones or other switchboards In this mode the switchboard acts as an apartment Station CALLS LOG Storage of calls performed by apartment stations VoIP telephones and other switchboards is another available system function All the switchboard unanswered calls are saved in a list containing the call date and time the device identifier code i e the topologic or logic code and the name if the call comes from an apartment The switchboard attendant can read this list and recall the users 13 i Concierge Call in Night Mode has been selected in site configuration for further details see paragraph Site Configuration on page 98 the Switchboard will receive anyway the competence call 55 Per VOICE 5 3 PANIC SERVICE PANIC ALARM The Panic Service present in IPervoice system allows to send a rescue request from apartment stations to their competence area switchboards This alarm has no effects on audio video communications active in the column from which it comes the alarm sent to the switchboard is stored in the system log in order to allow the attendant to manage it according to the system configuration The alarm log is available for future browsing The alarm activates the local alarm output on the 4 user decoder 1039 34 associated to the apartment Switchboard View Tools
288. ssign residents address books to system call modules to be defined In a large complex there may be thousands of residents so call modules must manage only their specific part of the residents directory A practical example can be useful to explain this In the complex there are three buildings called Fast Block Main Block and West Block The visitors of the East Block come in through the gate controlled by the call module Primary East Call Module the visitors of the other two buildings go through the door managed by the module Primary Main Call Module In this scenario the Primary East Call Module must have access to East Block residents address book but the Primary Main Call Module only to Main Block and West Block address book To associate a call module to its respective buildings as shown in the example in the section Block Group Figure 74 select the desired item s and click the button Confirm on the bottom side of the page All the residents associated to the apartments included in the selected buildings Blocks will be automatically accessible for the call module and for the visitors that will use this module P Block group Check all Uncheck all gt East Block iy _ Main Block Left Stair _ Right Stair gt West Block Figure 74 Configurazione Avanzata Gestione gruppi sui Moduli di Chiamata Principali W Note for buildings with more than one st
289. ssoossssssoosscsssososessosssesssosssessosssssssossssssosossessssssseeoo 181 Apartment selectioner a E a aa 181 AddineanapartmMmenteros ae a e aa 183 Apartment advanced config rati Mis eses E aa 185 11 3 1 Floors accessible by the residents Of the apartment nnnnnnnnnnnnn1010nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnntrrrrrrrrrrrnrrnnnnnn 185 dei Wie A mthe calme calmo di Ease a a EN eer oer errr 186 TES Pam ES accesses Oude asataaa da aumantmtare td tatectat Aecinceteceatute dude date eendaaeNogeaneucnnmeee ee daanes 187 TEA OAM BUM OINS ceee e a a ck ee haaeiauaedae dawson 188 M3 ae SME ClAN EUIN CUO NS esa E weuehauaedynstaaeiaaeeccusenahciatadaciosauaueiwcaactsene a aaeeteaek ca 189 Resident Wana Semen oss csscshscreitatn vec strrsbaadisodausssnatond a eed atin a 191 11 4 1 Residents Address BOOK Updating ccc ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeess 193 AAD Door COME COMB UNAUION sae a test ccuaedetededantdacedctic aaa tuaudinaheedeeesentaceitee reedinnst 194 TLAS KeyCode Conioaio ccc a a 196 1A Automa Key Code Wizard oo ea A E neon 198 Apartment Stations Confieuratio Nns a a Sivan a a a 204 Intercom Interface Configuration ssssesssssessssessrssesensersessrsersttsetrsttststiserstestestestnsrstrstnseneeseeseneesereee 206 PAD artMments COnTioura CON asesir er enana RIE EE E a 209 Advanced functions configuration ssssssssssosssssssossesssossssssosssessososssssosssessososses
290. ssssssesoo 211 Time ProHlES sserrrmeu onna aa aT TTEA EE 211 DEL MERNE DOO keera a E E eed anapunereberanlen 213 LA HMEROME ACESS a A N 214 13 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 VD AS Hold aysen EEEE OES 215 AE ESE PONE aea a a a tec ae ene es eae 216 12 2 1 Access Profiles in Multi Site Mode 0000000000nnnnnnnnnnesssonoononnennnnssssssooorrernnnnnsssssssssssrronrrennnnnssssosorerrrenenesssse 218 Biolog sicelil Suerte tre E ean renreT rrr tr rrr crt ter errr rrr tres 219 a DOORPHOTNES Call NOG UG enean ai reciente at ela tele Nadal de tenet E ale ah a EE 220 1232 DOOHPHOIMNMES KEV REIWEN NS 222 External Person GhOUDS ssa ietiuvcrucoalehsanteaiaecacetisdoas a naan 224 12 4 2 Entering Names in Multi Site MOde cc cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeees 229 WISER CUSTOM TICICS aacan ce505ccbeascuaus A yon uesoaess os eansousevelonnGadage tuaasernenaiaaeh each saneea sr baxenccasanoiensess 231 LOM CS acai TE nce cesses N E uu Radiat EEEE T E sassaatua 233 Sener COMMA Ue onson hoses caer a 236 12 7 1 Server Configuration in Multi Site MOG cc ccc cece ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 Software Users CONTSUrat lO Misia saci vacouactendeccenteasesgh aaah ba aouier a 241 T8 1 HP PCCM OS CUS ca ceccsteescccsccck ee a E feet thc a E ieee tae 242 T82
291. stics 2 x CAT5 RJ45 ports for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption in standby 1 mA 1740 1 200 mA max 1740 40 120 mA Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 205 W x 225 H x 50 D mm Installation wall mounting with bracket 1740 95 Door phone for CATS 1139 2 The door phone for CAT5 1139 2 is dedicated exclusively for use in the analogue columns of the IPervoice system It is provided with a door lock release button and 3 buttons for optional functions It has the same extra slim style as SIGNO series Main technical characteristics 1 x CAT5 RJ45 port for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption in standby 1 mA 35 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 100 W x 225 H x 50 D mm Installation wall mounting 36 Main technical characteristics e 2 x CATS RJ45 ports for the daisy chain connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT e 4 x CATS ports for the connection of 4 apartment stations DER1 DER4 e Power supply BUS CAT5 e Current consumption in standby 1 mA 35 mA max e Operating temperature range 5 45 C e Dimensions 108 W x 64 H x 90 D mm 6 DIN modules e Installation DIN rail Main technical characteristics e 2 x CAT5 RJ45 ports for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT e 1 connector used for
292. t Name Firstname Phone number Accessibility Level Access profile Used door code Last name required field Max length 32 characters First name required field Max length 32 character Telephone number associated to the name Optional field Max length 16 alohanumeric characters If selected it allows from the pull down menu to multiply by the indicated factor the door opening time programmed on the device Allowed values min 1 max 10 Default value Not selected Selection of the user access profile if available The value can be selected from a pull down menu which contains the previously programmed profiles if present For information about access profile definition refer to chapter Advanced functions configuration Access Profile on page 216 If selected this means that a door lock release code has been assigned to the name For programming procedure see paragraph Door Code Configuration on page 194 Default value Not selected 228 Used Key code Door Code Key Code Time profile Start validity End validity Suspended i er VOICE If selected this means that a proximity key has been assigned to the name For programming procedure see paragraph Key Code Configuration on page 196 Default value Not selected Door lock release numeric code required field if the user has selected Used door code Min length 4 characters max 8 characters Proximity key identifi
293. t Phone p o e HK HK MH HM HK HM HM MK RM HM KM BM SP MP BP SP MP MP Se HM HP KM MP BP SMP SP MP MP MP Se HM HM Me MP SP ee Se ee eee eee e First config Step gt Second config Step Figure 106 Column devices programming procedure configuration steps 157 i er VOICE At present the following Mobile products are supported by Pervoice gt PDA or PDAPhone with Symbian operating system e g Nokia gt PDA or PDAPhone with Windows Mobile operating system e g HTC Samsung gt Netbook and Notebook with Windows operating system XP Vista W Warning all the listed products must be provided with a Bluetooth communication interface in order to download data to column devices by means of the Bluetooth programming device 1039 56 PDA phones must also have a USB port for connection with the PC used to access the FrontEnd 10 1 1 SOFTMOBILE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Data download from the PDA Phone to the column device is performed with a software application that must be available on the PDA If this operation is performed for the first time or if a new Mobile device must be used the SoftMobile software must be installed With the Pervoice FrontEnd it is possible to select the version suitable for the PDA being used and then download it to the PC for the installation To perform this operation select the item MAINTENANCE from the main menu and then Write to Mobile
294. t value No time profile applied If selected it allows to define the validity start date of the proximity key Before this date the code will not open the passage Default value Not selected If selected it allows to define the validity start date of the proximity key After this date the code will not open the passage Default value Not selected If selected the proximity key will be disabled and will not allow to open the passage Default value Not selected Colour code used to identify the proximity key The final code is composed by the two colours that can be selected from the pull down menus Figure 149 The available colours are None White Blue Red Green Yellow Orange Default value None W Note to put the selected colour code on the proximity key insert the provided coloured insets in the suitable slots on the back of the key Selection of doors enabled to be opened If the check box at the top of the list is selected the doors of all devices are enabled then those of a specific device type and so on Table 49 Door Code configuration Meaning of configuration data 197 Per VOICE Wi Used key code Key code eeeeeeee Time profile 7 Color None None End validity 12012 05 Suspended Figure 149 Key Code configuration Colour code assignment 11 4 4 AUTOMATIC KEY CODE WIZARD In order to assign the identification code of a proximity key it is also possible to follo
295. tatus detected by the system The status can be e UNKNOWN The device is not configured or not yet polled by the system e POLLIN PROGRESS The server is polling the device to obtain the status information e ALIVE The device has been configured and operates correctly e DEAD The device has been configured but it does not communicate with the server Table 16 IP CAT5 Gateway identification data 99 Per VOICE GATEWAY BLOCK AND STAIR ASSIGNMENT Each gateway is always associated to a building Block and to a Stair so it is necessary to select from the two pull down lists the Block Code and the Stair Code that identify the block and the stair If the block code the stair code or both of them are not included in the lists they need to be added and then selected If the system is completely new the first time both lists will be empty so the block must be added first and then the stair By clicking the button Add a block the area New block Figure 45 will be displayed where the block name and code can be entered Gateway Code Blockcode Addablock New block Name East Tower Code Bi Confirm Cancel Figure 45 Startup Wizard Block adding Name Block identifier required field Maximum length 32 alphanumeric characters Code Block code required field It must be unique in the system It is the first two characters for the topological call code Fixed length 2 alphanumer
296. ted to that input ROOM MONITOR ACTIVATED BY PANIC ALARM After a panic alarm the switchboard attendant can activate the room monitor function that allows to listen what it is happening inside the apartment from which the alarm has been sent This service described below can be activated if the corresponding option has been enabled on the apartment station Apartment Stations Configuration on page 205 and only after an alarm indication The attendant cannot deliberately activate the room monitor inside an apartment 5 4 ROOM MONITOR SERVICE The room monitor service allows the switchboard attendant to establish an audio communication with an apartment in order to listen what happens inside The attendant can establish an audio communication with an apartment station only if the following conditions are met A panic or intrusion alarm has been sent from the apartment Yy In the apartment there is at least one hands free station as for example the model 1707 1 V The room monitor has been enabled on the apartment station by IPervoice FrontEnd Yy The hands free apartment station enabled for room monitor feature must be configured as Master door phone The audio communication can be mono directional from apartment station to switchboard both in case of panic alarm and intrusion alarm in all cases the audio communication is activated with the hands free apartment station configured as Master 4
297. ters Installation Prescriptions on page 72 and Advices for devices installation on page 77 have been performed The following points must also be checked e To have the MAC address list of IP devices to be configured specifying their location in the system the MAC Address is printed on the device identification label 92 Per VOICE e The procedure described in the paragraph VoIP Telephone Configuration Preliminary Operations for VoIP 4501 5 telephone registration on page 114 has been performed on the VoIP telephones 4501 5 or VOIP ATA interfaces 4501 30 to be configured This procedure gets the telephones IP address in order to associate it to the telephone location e f in the system there are concierge switchboards make sure that the Switchboard application that performs the switchboard functions is running on all the PCs dedicated to that service 8 3 THE STARTUP WIZARD To make the system configuring operations easier especially for the first system start up the IPervoice system provides a guided procedure that once activated from the Frontend helps the user step by step to set up the data necessary for the correct operation of the system This procedure is called StartUp Wizard and is launched by clicking with the mouse on the respective menu item Paragraph The main menu on page 88 W Warning the StartUp Wizard makes it possible to perform the basic configuring operations of
298. tional buttons SIGNO 1740 1 and 2 20 For call ring tones programming floor and video door phone calls refer to user manuals of each device 83 Per VOICE 8 PERVOICE CONFIGURATION After describing the Pervoice system installation it is possible to deal with the system functions configuration according to specific customer requirements 8 1 GENERAL INFORMATION For IPervoice system set up the installer must perform some configurations to make the system work as required In particular two main steps are needed 1 Configuration of the devices on the IP network 2 Configuration of the column devices The first phase is performed using a personal computer which allows all the devices connected to the IP network to be installed and configured by the same unit at the same time the configuration data for the column devices is defined This data is then downloaded to a PDA or to a SmartPhone provided with a Bluetooth interface used to perform the second phase of configuration This is performed on each column device that needs configuration parameters for its operation for example the 4 user decoder 1039 34 or the intercom interface module 1039 36 W Multi Site Pervoice Multi Site configuration will follow the same diagram used for Mono Site standard systems setup of IP network and column devices will be performed in a similar way Pe te aa ea fie oS ee SS ee rea er cee AE BD rn ee nn ee eng TE ET ee eT
299. to set the function behaviours and some data that affects the system performance The Table 15 includes all the data and their default values 96 Default value Language Language used by the system It can be selected from the English pull down menu Refer to Frontend to get the updated list of supported languages Addressing method Method used to determine the devices addressing in the call Topologic codes codes It can be selected from the pull down menu Allowed values Topological codes Logic codes Concierge Call Call to switchboard is enabled also in night mode Disable in night mode Allowed values Enabled Disabled Power cycle Frequency in Hertz of power supply mains It can be 50 Hz selected from the pull down menu Allowed values 50 Hz 60 Hz Call Pickup time T1 Call Pickup time 60 seconds RU irssomensseosems Guaranteed Guaranteed conversation time 30 seconds conversation time T2 min 1 max 540 seconds Circular log buffer size Size of circular log buffer 999 events eua m Unconditional Alarm Alarm reset without local actions True P Reset time Time available for the switchboard attendant to reset the 2550 seconds alarm where it is generated The value is used only if the previous condition is set to False Total Bandwidth for IP network bandwidth used for audio and video 100 Mb s audio and video communications It can be selected from the pull down menu Allowed values 10 Mb s 100 Mb s unlimited M
300. ton Add in the related list page under the title The Figure 219 shows some examples o mee Primary Call Module List Add a primary call module Secondary Call Module List Tie VolP phone list 7 ete ee Figure 219 System maintenance Access to the function for adding devices 13 6 1 ADDING NEW IP DEVICES In the example an IP key reader 1039 88 is added but as already said the procedure is the same as 7108 the FrontEnd shows for the other IP devices From the devices tree select the item Key Readers the list of existing devices Figure 220 by pressing the button Add a key reader the user is redirected to the page New Device Figure 221 already described for replacement where the device to be added must be selected Name Address IP MAC Parking Access eile 192 168 2 12 00 1E E0 00 10 C1 Delete Figure 220 System maintenance Adding a new IP reader It is also possible to directly access to the ttem New Device from the devices tree and then select the device to be added t0 The current FrontEnd version allows to add IP devices only if they are already included in the list New Device 260 Configure Replace Figure 221 System maintenance Selecting a device to be added W Warning the list always shows all the devices detected by the system The user must select the device to be added by consideri
301. tor 1039 54 Power supply unit py 1039 20 Figure 26 Internal level riser topology and distances with riser distributor If more than one riser is needed a riser distributor 1039 54 can be installed on the output of the first power supply Even though the available risers are four remember that the distributor that is a passive component does not change riser dimensioning parameters that remain the same For example the total extension must be calculated by adding all the four risers distances and is always 900 m the same for the max number of 4 user decoders that is always 270 69 Internal wiring topology amp distances Max 50 m i t i Power supply unit Intercom Interface gA 1039 20 gaa 1039 36 i 4 user decoder 1039 34 Max 4 Interfaces Max 4 Door Phones Max estension per Intercom interface 200 m Power supply unit we 1039 20 Figure 27 Livello interno colonna montante topologia e distanze con interfacce intercomunicanti If in apartments one or more intercom interface 1039 36 is needed install a power supply 1039 20 on the derived branch of the 4 user decoder This in order to power apartment stations and intercom interfaces Besides the constraints above described consider the following specific rules gt The max number of apartment stations that can be installed on each intercom interface derived branch is 4 so the number of apartment station
302. tring value Max length Max length allowed for custom field contents The FrontEnd checks this data during entering Mandatory If selected it indicates that the field is mandatory and must always be filled Default value Not selected Once custom fields have been filled these will be displayed in detail pages of users belonging to the External person group as shown the figure on the Resident LastName Customer left If in Multi Site mode this additional information Resident FirstName Service will be available for all the concerned sites Phone number Accessiblity level 232 12 6 ZONES IPervoice system access control allows to manage also advanced functions concerning restricted access zones Available features are anti pass back and counting which can be tuned during configuration Anti pass back control avoids that a person just entered in a controlled zone allows another person to enter using the same access identity Key or Door code Without this control several persons could enter a controlled area using a single access code Using access control functions IPervoice system can control gt The same Key code Door code after entering the zone must go out before entering again gt The same Key code Door code after entering the zone can enter again in the same zone even if he hasn t left the zone only after a configurable time gt The number of persons present in a zone is
303. try of configuration data with the StartUp Wizard may not be enough for the required operation the installer must complete the configuration by entering the other data as described in the chapter IPervoice Devices advanced Configuration Concierge Switchboard on page 138 8 3 7 VIDEO SERVER CONFIGURATION As for the other devices to start the configuration select the desired video server from the list of new detected devices and press the button Next to access the details page where to enter the requested configuration data Table 25 describes data to be entered and their meaning Last Name IP address MAC address FW version Device status Previous Garage Video Server 192 168 2 12 OO 1E2E0 00 14 54 2 0 0 21 ALIVE Backto main page Figure 57 Startup Wizard Configuration of a new Video Server Name Device identifier required field Max length 32 characters IP address IP address automatically assigned by the system server to the reader MAC address Device unique physical address Used to identify the devices during configuration FW version Application software version of the Video Server Device status Device status detected by the system the status can be UNKNOWN POLL IN PROGRESS ALIVE DEAD Table 25 Video Server Identification data 111 Per VOICE 8 3 8 IP KEY READER CONFIGURATION Also in this case the procedure is the same select from the list the devices to be con
304. ttons present on the video door phone The telephones can be used as IP apartment stations for example in a bar or swimming pool or also as a switchboard with reduced functions installed in a porter s lodge for night surveillance W Warning The VoIP telephones cannot read the user directory as the call modules 1039 13 and 14 but as described later a local directory can be configured using the configuration web application embedded in each telephone 4501 5 17 IPervoice system supports only VoIP telephones certified by Urmet other telephone types could not work or make the whole system work incorrectly 63 Per VOICE 6 TECHNICAL PRESCRIPTIONS IPervoice system as already described in the chapter System Architecture on page 13 is structured in two different levels the external level where the IP network is implemented and the internal level composed by risers Even though the two networks are different for topology max allowed distance and extension in both cases it is suggested to follow the information below in order to make the system reliable and assure correct operation also in large buildings 6 1 PRESCRIPTIONS FOR EXTERNAL LEVEL IPervoice Street Side is composed by a 100 Mb s Ethernet network so the topology is star point to point In each centre there is a PoE switch 1039 44 or 1039 45 Each star centre is the PoE switch 1039 44 or 1039 45 where all IP IPervoice devices are connected Extern
305. tuations SoftMobile Go Yy x 11 45 ok Site List Technical Guide System Site List eT echnical Guide System Enter Read From BT Config 1 About 2 Config aq 3 READ FROM BT End Midlet _ Search Figure 124 SoftMobile Windows Mobile and Symbian versions Device search feature 171 Per VOICE For both PDA models the search can be performed by Topological Code and by Device Name and Type Figure 125 To start searching select the item Search topologic Topologic Code Device Type amp Device C ode 0 J l Ati l ALL Code 1 Gateway Lift Code 2 om Decoder Villa Code 3 im Master DoorPH Figure 125 SoftMobile Windows Mobile and Symbian versions Search mode The list displayed depends on the search mode in the first case the display will show the items identified by a Topological Code according to the configured search method typically Blocks Stairs Floors and Apartments Double click on the desired item to access the list of its devices In the second case the list of devices belonging to the selected type will be directly accessed in this case double click on the desired item to directly display its detailed data he System elements can be searched also by filling partially the search field for example the first two digits of the topological code or the first characters of the device name 73 When accessing a st
306. umber of decoders that can be installed on that segment and the number of apartments gt The max number of video door phone apartment stations that can be installed on each 4 user decoder derived branch is 4 gt The max number of door phone apartment stations 1139 2 that can be installed on each 4 user decoder derived branch or intercom interface is 1 gt The max distance between a column power supply and the last apartment station installed on the same segment is 100 m in case of several video door phone apartment stations installed in series on the same derived branch the calculation for distance must be done starting from the last apartment station of the series gt The max distance between a 4 user decoder output and the last of its apartment stations must be shorter or equal to 50 m gt The max extension between all the devices connected to a 4 user decoder derived branch must not exceed 200 m P Contrary to video door phones 1707 1 1717 1 1740 1 and 1740 40 the door phone 1139 2 is not equipped with an RJ45 output connector so it is not possible to connect in series another apartment station 68 Internal wiring topology amp distances Max risers extension 900 m _ Power supply unit Power supply unit i pe 4 as Ait tea kd TT ih _ erry LES eS 4 Fa 2s Ss 4 user decoder _ p 1039 34 amp 4 user decoder 1039 34 Max 100 m ieee Riser distribu
307. ur system Have you backed up your system t The firmware will be upgraded with version 3 1 0 19 It s hardly This upgrade will be applied on selected servers All sites J Test 3 1 Server 1 W Test 3 1 Server 2 Test 3 1 Server3 Yes continue Figure 215 System maintenance Server upgrade in multi site mode upgrade confirmation FINALIZING THE UPGRADE OF IPERVOICE SERVERS IN MULTI SITE MODE After completing the restart of the server from which the Firmware Upgrade operation was performed the FrontEnd see Figure 216 requires a manual restart of the other servers involved in multi site operation To do this simply press Reboot for each of the listed servers The FrontEnd will update the status of each server in order to show the operation result Check system consistency Ay Device name Device type Status Actual fw Expected fw Date Status fw WP Server Server ALIVE 3 1 0 18 3 1 0 19 2012 02 15 COMPLETED A SWI_N15 Switchboard UNKNOWN 1 5 34 1 5 3 6 2012 02 15 gg FAILED Upgrade amp SWI_N10 Switchboard UNKNOWN 14534 1 5 3 6 2012 02 15 FAILED Upgrade amp SWB1 Switchboard UNKNOWN 14 534 1 5 3 6 2012 02 15 FAILED Upgrade W Remote server 10 1 8 1 Server ALIVE 3 4 0 49 3 4 0 49 2012 02 15 REBOOT Reboot Remote server 10 1 6 1 Server ALIVE 3 1 0 19 3 4 0 19 2012 02 15 REBOOT Reboot W Remote server 10 1 5 1 Server ALIVE 3 1 0 49 3 1 0 19 2012
308. uspend Plot N26N 10 1 26 1 M Delete Plot N26S 10 1 27 1 z Delete Suspend Q Activate E Deactivate Confirm Cancel A if Update Update Suspend Figure 194 Multi Site mode Advanced functions configuration Multi Site configuration CUpdate Multi Site name Name assigned to the Multi Site system Max length 32 characters Site name Name assigned to the site as described in paragraph 8 3 2 Site Configuration on page 96 Address IP Site IP address NTP Site operating as reference server for date and time in the Multi Site system This function is usually assigned by the FrontEnd to the first site added to the system It is possible to assign this feature to another server by selecting it from the list and pressing the button Update State Operating status values e ok the site is online and operates properly e connection fail the site is off line or can not be reached 239 Per VOICE For each site in the list there are also three buttons used to perform the following operations Delete Remove the site from the Multi Site configuration configuration of devices groups and users Resident and External and all other data needed for the proper operation of the site are kept in order to be available for standard mode Suspend the site from the Multi Site configuration the site keeps operating Suspend i properly with its current configur
309. utomatic gate or barrier The call module has an embedded proximity key reader for access control It is equipped with a colour camera with wide angle lens and presence detector for energy saving The graphic display allows access with a guided procedure to the different functions provided by the device for example e Easy access to the name directory e Reading of absence messages e Map of access path e Easy user code entry The call module allows entry to the building also by entering a user code on the alphanumeric keypad in this case it is also possible to manage a duress function that allows a silent alarm to be sent to the concierge switchboard at the same time as the door being opened Specific functions for disabled people are also available 17 IP video 2 button door unit 1039 72 The video door unit 1039 72 is dedicated to the Pervoice system and is designed on two module Sinthesi style It is equipped with a CCD colour camera and two configurable call buttons If needed the number of call buttons can be increased by means of the expansion module 1038 17 The door unit can manage 2 expansion modules max to reach a total of 32 buttons Main technical characteristics CCD colour camera 2 call buttons Button expansion by means of max 2 1038 17 modules with 16 buttons each Power supply PoE 48 V nominal Current consumption 140 mA min 180 mA max Operating temperature range 10 50 C Dimens
310. vailable doors List of doors used to enter the zone List of doors used to leave the zone For security reasons an exit door can always be used also when the same door allows to enter an adjacent zone For this reason consider it when defining the service model for ex the door P1 is the exit door for the zone A and at the same time is the entrance door for the zone B The user U1 can enter the zone A but not the zone B If the user must pass through the door P1 to exit from the zone A the door P1 will open allowing an unauthorized user to access the zone B 235 Per VOICE 12 7 SERVER CONFIGURATION In the main menu select the item SRV CONFIGURATION to access IPervoice server configuration page Figure 192 Command Command Execute Activate IperView All updates need reboot server Date amp time Timing zone Europe Rome UTC 01 00 x Automatic Daylight saving time v Daylight Saving Time status inactive MMIDDIYYYY Server date amp time 11 13 2011 20 23 34 All updates need reboot server Set Cancel IP address 192 168 1 1 on Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default router DNS server Free Blocked 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 1254 65534 aviable address Figure 192 Advanced functions configuration Pervoice Server parameter configuration System date and time additional parameters are configurable The following table describes their meaning Command Res
311. value Not selected Used Key code If selected this means that the profile concerns proximity keys Default value Not selected Time profile Selection of time profile assigned to door lock release codes or proximity keys which will select this access profile For information about access profile refer to chapter Advanced functions configuration Time Profile Access on page 214 Default value No time profile applied Start validity If selected it allows to define the validity start date assigned to door lock release codes or proximity keys which will select this access profile Before this date the passage will not open Default value Not selected End validity If selected it allows to define the validity end date assigned to door lock release codes or proximity keys which will select this access profile After this date the passage will not open Default value Not selected 217 Selected Door for Door Code Selected Door for Key Code Ir er Voice Selection of doors enabled to be opened by a door lock release code Selecting the check box on the top of the list the doors of all devices are enabled then the ones belonging to a type of devices and so on Selection of doors enabled to be opened by proximity keys Selecting the check box on the top of the list the doors of all devices are enabled then the ones belonging to a type of devices and so on 12 2 1 ACCESS PROFILES IN MULTI SITE MODE In Multi S
312. vanced functions configuration Door Profiles on page 219 Default value Custom 131 Type Door Time Door Forced Alarm Max Door opening Time Time Profile i Er VOICE Type of door opening The value can be selected from a pull down menu the available values are e Secret the apartment station door lock release button will only activate the electrical lock if the apartment is in audio conversation or in video connection with the call module or has been called and is waiting to be answered e Free ifthe apartment station door lock release button is pressed the call module electrical lock can be activated if the call module is configured as main or is configured as secondary and the user belongs to the same column as the call module This feature is typically used in the secondary call Default value Secret Lock relay time Default value 1 second Each door is independent so different values can be assigned to each one min 1 sec max 999 sec Default value 1 sec If selected this means that the door generates an alarm if it has been forced Default value Not selected W Warning to use this function connect an open door sensor to the call module It defines the max time of door opening after which a door open signal is generated Min 1 sec max 999 sec Default value not enabled W Warning to use this function connect an open door sensor to the call module Selection of Time Profile ass
313. vents list saved by IPervoice for details see paragraph 13 10 1 on page 270 gt Delete Log It deletes all the records in the system log The FrontEnd asks the user for a confirmation before deleting gt Export Log This function allows to export the events log in CSV format Comma Separated Values which can be easily read by programs as Excel or similar ones gt Quit Log Used to exit from log management and return to FrontEnd main menu 13 10 1 CUSTOMIZED LOG SEARCH After pressing the button Log Search the page shows some fields that can be used to perform specific searches in the event log The user can enter search keys in the page shown in Figure 235 Search by Date Time Start Date 2011 11 15 evvvv men0 Start Time HH mm End Date 2011 11 15 pvvvy4a 00 End Time HH mm Event Type Source Destination Data Type Key code Search Figure 235 Utility functions Customized search in system log 270 i Er VOICE The following table describes the fields available to create the search filter and their meaning Date Time Event Type Source Destination Data Type Key code If selected it allows to set a date interval where to search the event it is also possible to enter start time and end time With the pull down menu it is possible to set a filter for the event type Some of the available values are Call request Door Opening Authentication error or Alarm reset Some eve
314. voice Devices advanced Configuration IP Call Module Doors on page 129 even if in this case as shown in Figure 96 there are fewer parameters enn a Name Vehicle Entrance gate riv n i nin Notassigned Outputs Figure 96 Advanced configuration Adding a new door to the IP Key Reader W warning the relay output of 1039 88 can directly drive an electrical lock but if the relay is used to open a vehicle entrance gate for security reasons the command must always be carried out by an automation equipment control unit dedicated for this purpose The gate opening must never be directly activated by the relay output 9 6 1 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS The special command performed by the IP key reader is the following Drive output on Door The system executes the function on the configured outputs when the Opening door lock release command is sent using the proximity key or the Exit switch input 145 9 7 SPECIAL DECODER The special decoder advanced configuration concerns operation modes of the two relay outputs present in the device To access the configuration page select the item Special decoders from the devices tree identify the desired device and select the number of the output to be configured Figure 97 ot 7 t Technical Guide System a Time Profiles H Cy Access Profiles oa pe Primary call module Name est Block Main comdo Primary eniry panel LE IP address 492 16
315. w a guided procedure with the Wizard which can be activated by the FrontEnd main menu Figure 150 DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE Automatic Key Code Wizard Figure 150 Automatic Key Code Wizard Function selection To use this function the device Encoder 125 is needed which is used to read proximity key codes The Encoder 125 must be connected with the provided cable to a USB port of the computer where the IPervoice FrontEnd is being used The device is directly powered by the PC and so it doesn t need any additional power supply Remember to connect the Encoder before starting Wizard so the system can correctly identify it In the first Wizard page it is possible to define some search criteria and options which will be used to assign identification codes The table describes the meaning of available items 88 The device is correctly powered by the PC USB port if the bicolor led on the device is RED 198 Per VOICE A Automatic Key Code wizard Selechon J Residents Externals Residents Block Al i Stair All Fioor All Apartment Al Externals Externals groups All Options Skips persons who have already a key code configured ask for confirmation before overwriting the existing code Back to main page Next Figure 151 Automatic Key Code Wizard Search criteria selection After search criteria have been defined press the button Next The system activates the Encoder and is ready to r
316. wer supply unit 1707 01 1039 20 ae CC srt ee a Up to 4 devices per intercom interface Up to 4 intercom interface per apartment bike Intercom Interface i 1039 36 ey Figure 10 The internal level distribution inside the apartments 33 Main technical characteristics 4 3 TFT LCD colour graphic display Resolution 480H x 272V RGB dot Horizontal viewing angle 75 75 Vertical viewing angle 60 70 2 x CATS RJ45 ports for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption standby 1 mA 160 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 130 W x 160 H x 29 7 D mm Installation wall flush mounted with box 1716 80 and table mounted with stand 1716 50 Accessories set of coloured front panels 1716 51 Main technical characteristics 3 5 TFT LCD colour graphic display Resolution 960H x 240V RGB dot Horizontal viewing angle 60 60 Vertical viewing angle 55 55 2 x CAT5 RJ45 ports for the connection to the decoder 1039 34 BUS IN BUS OUT Power supply BUS CAT5 Current consumption standby 1 mA 160 mA max Operating temperature range 5 45 C Dimensions 148 W x 170 H x 54 D mm Installation flush mounted with box 1706 60 on plasterboard with kit 1706 61 AIKO hands free video door phone 1716 3 black 1716 4 white The video door phone 1716 3 or 4 is equipp
317. window will appear asking to confirm temporary files deletion check that both tick boxes are selected and press OK When this operation has been completed it is possible to execute Automatic Key Wizard or download to the PC the new version of Encoder management application IDENTIFICATION CODES ASSIGNMENT KEY CODE Figure 156 is the Wizard page where to assign Resident Proximity key In the page there are two sections gt Current Person gt Next Person The first one shows the person resident or external whom the code acquired by the encoder will be assigned The second one shows the next person selected by Wizard according to search criteria specified before To go to the next person with no changes press the button Skip on the right bottom side of the page Automatic Key Code wizard Current Person Last Mame Brown First Name John Apartment Apartment Al tw Back to select choice page Backto main page Skip Figure 156 Automatic Key Code Wizard resident selection To assign a proximity key put the key in the seat on the Encoder and wait for the confirmation beep emitted by the device if the proximity key is not assigned to another user and the selected person has not an assigned key the Wizard executes the operation and suggests the next person If the person is already assigned to a key the system asks for a confirmation showing the Popup window Figure 157 202 ke Do
318. wn by a red icon in the devices tree save operations will not be possible This because servers data would not be coherent inside the system If it is needed to operate also in such specific requirements the disconnected site must be suspended from its normal operation as described in paragraph Server Configuration in Multi Site Mode on page 240 215 Per VOICE 12 2 ACCESS PROFILE As already mentioned also door lock release code and proximity key management can be performed by defining one or more profiles according to requirements To access this function select from the devices tree the item Access Profiles See Figure 173 if the system in configured in standard mode or Figure 174 in Multi Site mode b a ai Technica Gude System Y Tene Profile Access cy Access Profiles East Block Profile Main Block profie 3 East Block Profile Delete Standard Profie 2 Main Block profile Deiet a West Block Profile 1 Standard Profis Delete 2 Vest Block Profle Delete q Door Profiles Figure 173 Advanced functions configuration List of access profiles EY C Time Profile Access a i Cy Access Profiles East Block Profile Main Block profile Code Name lt gt Standard Profile 3 East Block Profe Delete West Block Profile 2 Main Block profile Delete 1 Standard Profile Delete Pai Door Pro fies 4 West Block Profile Delete ae jy Switchboards E an

iPervoice Installation Manual V3.20

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents